JP2020069045A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enable reliable control processing.SOLUTION: A game machine that generates a special game state advantageous to a player when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and a result of the game is a special result includes control means (a game control device 100) for executing control of a game. The control means executes loop processing for repeatedly executing predetermined processing and timer interruption processing which is executed every prescribed time. Information set in the timer interruption processing is used in the loop processing, and the cycle of the loop processing is shorter than that of the timer interruption processing.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result.

  There is known a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is given to a player when the result of the game is a special result. In such a gaming machine, the game control means controls the game by executing various processes (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2015-110156, A

  As a game control process, when processing is performed by a main process and a timer interrupt process that interrupts the main process at predetermined time intervals, if data is exchanged between the two processes, etc. There may be a problem with the control process. An object of the present invention is to enable reliable control processing.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
A game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result,
Equipped with control means for controlling the game,
The control means is
Loop processing that repeats predetermined processing,
Perform timer interrupt processing that is executed every predetermined time,
The information set in the timer interrupt process is configured to be used in the loop process,
The cycle of the loop processing is shorter than the cycle of the timer interrupt processing.

  According to the present invention, reliable control processing can be enabled.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in the special game state. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in the special game state. It is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart explaining probability setting change / confirmation processing. It is a figure explaining the display in a performance display apparatus. It is a flow chart explaining winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining fraud & prize monitoring processing. It is a flow chart for explaining the winning number counter updating process. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special process starting port switch common processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure reservation information judging processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure reservation information judging processing. It is a flow chart explaining pre-reading big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 game process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 game process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 game process. It is a flowchart explaining a special process 1 normal processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special process 2 normal processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a falling lottery process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process and a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart explaining fluctuation start information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining time shortening change frequency update processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a change in special figure 1. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 process during a change. It is a flow chart explaining the processing during the special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart explaining a special figure 2 display processing. It is a flow chart explaining a special figure 2 display processing. It is a flow chart explaining fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing in fanfare / interval. It is a flow chart explaining processing in fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end setting process 1 and a big hit end setting process 2. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end setting processing 3. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart for explaining a general-purpose game process. It is a flow chart explaining processing during public figure display. It is a flow chart explaining 2-byte data acquisition processing. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol variation control process. It is a flowchart explaining a 1-byte subtraction process. It is a flowchart explaining a 1-byte addition process. It is the flowchart which explains production command setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining the processing during the special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart explaining a special figure 2 display processing. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / in-interval process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval processing. It is a figure explaining the area | region of ROM. It is a figure explaining the area | region of RAM. It is a figure explaining the correspondence of the program of ROM and the area | region of RAM. It is a flow chart explaining performance display monitor control processing. It is a flowchart explaining an initial display timer update process. It is a flow chart explaining performance display edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining output processing. It is a figure explaining the display in a performance display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display in a performance display apparatus. It is the flowchart which explains the main processing of the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart explaining reception command check processing. It is a flow chart explaining reception command analysis processing. It is a flow chart explaining variable system command processing. It is a figure explaining a prize sphere number display. It is a figure explaining an example of a pre-reading effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a pre-reading effect. It is a figure explaining the execution mode of a prefetching effect.

<First Embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is attached to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable / closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, a lamp, an LED, etc. are built in, and decorations and effects, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, the LED, etc., an abnormality notification color (for example, red The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) and the speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12 as well. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b inform the user of the content of the abnormality by voice. It should be noted that a lamp for notifying the dispensing abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (reservoir plate) for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown), and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. An upper plate ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower plate (receiving plate) 23 that stores the game balls that have been paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, and an operation unit 24 of the ball striking device are provided. Further, on the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21, an effect button 25 having an effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be provided separately from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device may be provided near the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  Further, to the right of the effect button 25, a ball lending button 27 which is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection which is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player rotates the operation unit 24 to cause the ball-striking launcher to shoot the gaming balls supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. To do. In addition, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), the effect of intervening the operation of the player is displayed. It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a plate-shaped game board body 80 that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30 on the front surface of the game board body 80. A game area 32 is provided. The gaming machine 10 is configured to shoot a game ball from a hitting ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails and the like are arranged as members for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

  A center case 40, which forms a window serving as a display area of the variable display game, is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. A display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is arranged behind the window formed in the center case 40.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (CRT). In the area where the image on the display screen can be displayed (display area), a still image or a moving image can be displayed as an effect image. For example, a plurality of identification information (special symbols) or a character that directs a special figure variable display game, Information about the game such as a background image that enhances the effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is played. Further, on the display screen, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed.

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 forming a warp flow path for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball passing through the warp flow path rolling. And a possible stage portion 620. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36, the game balls rolled on the stage portion 620 can easily win the starting winning opening 36.
Further, on the upper part of the center case 40, there is provided a board effect device 44 for effecting a game by operating. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit in the game area 32 passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, the universal figure variation display game is executed.

  One general winning opening 351 is arranged in the game area 32 on the upper right of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 352 is arranged in the game area 32 on the lower right of the center case 40. Further, in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, two general winning openings 353 and 354 are arranged. The winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 351 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3), and the winning of the gaming ball into the general winning opening 352 is detected by the winning opening switch 35b (see FIG. 3). In addition, the game balls that have won the general winning openings 353 and 354 are detected by the winning opening switch 35c (see FIG. 3) after they join.

  In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area) for providing a starting condition of the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) is provided. The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

On the right part of the center case 40, an ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area) for providing a start condition of the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) is provided. The game ball that has won the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The normal variation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (not shown), and this movable member always holds a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which the game ball cannot flow. Then, when the result of the universal figure variation display game is a predetermined result, the universal ball 37d (see FIG. 3) as a drive device allows the game ball to easily flow into the regular variation winning device 37 (open state (game). Can be changed to an advantageous condition for the person).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the movable member of the normal variation winning device 37 is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory that is opened and closed by advancing and retracting (sliding) in the front-back direction by the universal electric solenoid 37c. The movable member of 37 is not limited to this. The movable member of the ordinary variation winning device 37 may be, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that is opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the ordinary electric solenoid 37c tilts toward the front side, or the ordinary electric prize solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in an inverted "C" shape.
Further, the normal variation winning device 37 may allow the game ball to win even when the movable member is in the closed state, and may make the game ball less likely to win in the closed state than in the open state.

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, between the universal figure starting gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 37, there are a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A convertible first special variation winning device (upper special winning opening) 38 is provided. The first special variation winning device 38 converts the upper special winning opening into a state in which a game ball can flow in by an opening / closing member (not shown) moving forward and backward (sliding). According to the result of the special figure variation display game, the first special variation winning device 38 converts the upper special winning opening from the closed state to the open state, thereby facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the upper special winning opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game balls that have won the first special variation winning device 38 are detected by the special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3).

  Inside the upper special winning opening (winning area), a specific area into which the game ball can flow is provided, and the lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 3) so as to change the inflow probability of the game ball into the specific area. ) Is provided with a lever member. The specific area is provided with a specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 3) capable of detecting the inflow of the game ball, and based on the fact that the specific area switch 38d detects the game ball, the advantageous state for the player is found. It occurs (in this embodiment, a high-probability state occurs after the special game state ends). The game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variation winning device 38.

  Further, inside the upper special winning opening, there is provided a remaining ball outlet switch 38e (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball discharged to the outside of the first special variation winning device 38 without flowing into a specific area. ing. The number of game balls detected by the special winning opening switch 38a provided inside the upper special winning opening (the number of gaming balls flowing into the upper special winning opening), and the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharging opening switch 38e. It is possible to confirm that all the game balls in the upper prize hole have been discharged by matching the number of game balls (the number of game balls discharged from the upper prize hole), basically until this confirmation ends. Will not open a new upper prize hole.

  In the game area 32 below the center case 40, to the right of the starting winning opening 36, a second special variation winning prize that can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A device (lower prize winning opening) 39 is provided. The second special variation winning device 39, by opening and closing (not shown) forward and backward (slide), to convert the lower big winning opening into a state in which the game ball can flow. The second special variation winning device 39 converts the lower special winning opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the lower special winning opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the second special variation winning device 39 is detected by the special winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 3).

  The game area 32 below the start winning opening 36 is provided with an outlet 30a for collecting game balls that have not been won in the winning opening or the like. Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a general figure variation display game are executed outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board body 80. A collective display device 50 is provided.

  The collective display device 50 includes a special figure 1 display device (first special figure change display portion) 51 and a special figure 2 change display for a special figure 1 change display game, which is composed of a 7-segment type display device (LED lamp) or the like. Special figure 2 indicator for game (second special figure variation display section) 52, first memory display section 53 for informing the number of starting memory of special figure 1 variation display game composed of LED lamp, and LED lamp And a second memory display unit 54 for informing the number of remembered starting memories of the special figure 2 variable display game.

In addition, the collective display device 50, which is advantageous to the player among the round display unit 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the special variation winning devices 38 and 39), left hitting (normal hitting) and right hitting. A first game state display section 56 for notifying how to hit (how to hit corresponding to the game state) and a probability display section 57 for notifying the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure variation display game are provided. There is. It should be noted that the collective display device 50 has a probability state display section that displays that the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and a display that lights up when the big hit occurs and notifies the big hit occurrence. A section (display) or the like may be provided.
Further, the public figure display unit 58 for displaying the general figure variable display game, the general figure holding display section 59 for notifying the number of starting memory of the general figure variable display game, and lights when the time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state. A time saving state notification unit 60 and the like are provided.

  The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 is displayed at the center while the variation display game is being executed, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed on the display device 41. The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to 100 msec, for example. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of 7 segments is also driven to blink. It is configured such that the fact that it is fluctuating is displayed so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished from each other. Then, when the result of the game is “out”, for example, the central segment (in addition to the special figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side as a result) is turned on as a result mode of the out, and the result of the game is In the case of “win”, the game result is displayed by turning on a result mode (for example, numbers or symbols) other than the off result mode (special result mode).

The first memory display unit 53 turns off a plurality of LEDs for the number of unexploited balls (starting memory number = holding number) among the winning ball numbers into the starting winning port 36, which is a variation start condition of the special map 1 display device 51. , It lights up (flashes) and is displayed.
The second memory display unit 54 displays the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) among the plurality of LEDs among the number of winning balls to the normal variation winning device 37, which is the variation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52. It is displayed by turning it off and turning it on (blinking).
The round display unit 55 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and turns off all the LEDs when not in the special game state, and turns on the LEDs corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. Turn it on. The round display unit 55 may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

The first gaming state display unit 56 is composed of LED lamps and the like. For example, when the player is in a gaming state in which the left hitting is more advantageous to the player than the right hitting (normal hitting), all LEDs are turned off and left. When the player is in a gaming state in which the right-handedness is more advantageous to the player than the hitting (right-handedness), all the LEDs are turned on.
The probability display unit 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the probability state of the big hit is a low probability state (normal probability state), all the LEDs are turned off, and the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state (probability change state). In the case of, all the LEDs are turned on.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in an integrated manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It includes a CPU section 110 having the same, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port and a driver, a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110, the input section 120 and the output section 130, and the like. .

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillating circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, or DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to be operable. To be done.

  The power supply device 400 has a normal power supply unit including an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from an AC power supply of 24V and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as DC 12V, DC 5V from a voltage of 32V DC. 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the RAM inside the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal that notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure, A control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal is provided.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply part 420 and the control signal generation part 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, the main. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the object of replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 can store and retain the information about the game even when the power supply to the game machine is stopped due to a power failure, and the game can be restarted based on the stored information after the power failure is restored. It constitutes a game information storage holding means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to, for example, 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random number values at the time of game control. Used as. An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as starting memory. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before reaching A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the special result mode, in the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (special gaming state), some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed, and already derived. The display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derived display. Refers to the non-display mode. Then, for example, a state in which the variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result forms are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. A display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game varies a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. After displaying, in the case of displaying the result form by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the left and right variable display areas, the condition that satisfies the special result form (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas of the left, middle, and right (for example, the same The state that has become the identification information, but excluding the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this reach state.

  Then, the reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as a reach effect with a different possibility of deriving the special result mode (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit compared to the case where the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the symbol of the big hit, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various types). A random number generation circuit for generating a variation pattern random number for determining the reach and the execution time of the variation display game in the variation display without reach, and a hit random number for determining the hit of the general figure variation display game. And a clock generator that generates a clock for giving a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. There is.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A, the game result (big hit, small hit or out) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state, One of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the number of starting memories. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation allocation information acquisition unit that acquires any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of a payout unit to drive a payout ball according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  In the input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, Winning hole switches 35a, 35b, 35c in the general winning holes 351 to 354, a big winning hole switch 38a in the first special variable winning device 38, a big winning hole switch 39a in the second special floating winning device 39, a universal figure start The gate switch 34a in the gate 34, the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e arranged in the first special variation winning device 38, and all the game balls that have been launched into the game area 32 and finished the game are detected. Connected to the out-ball detection switch 32a, the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. No. is inputted, the interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that converts the positive logic signal 0V-5V is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I / F 121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or the proximity switch is illegally short-circuited, the sensor or switch is detached from the connector, or the lead wire is cut to float. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the occurrence of, and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124 or the fourth input port 126 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the special winning opening switches 38a and 39a, and the gate switch 34a are input to the second input port 123. To be done. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the specific area switch 38d, the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e, and the out ball detection switch 32a are input to the fourth input port 126. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

  Further, the third input port 124, the detection signal of the magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10, the detection signal of the vibration sensor 65 for detecting the vibration of the gaming machine 10, the gaming machine. The detection signal of the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of 10 and the detection signal of the main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. It has become.

  Further, a signal from the setting key switch 152 that detects the operation of the setting key operation unit is input to the third input port 124. The setting key operation unit is provided with a key hole into which the setting key is inserted, and is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. .. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor capable of detecting that it has been turned to the second position. The setting key switch 152 is turned on when it is turned to the second position and is not turned to the second position. If there is, it is turned off.

  The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which a probability value that will be a special result in the special figure variation display game is assigned, and operate these operation units. By doing so, you can select the probability setting value to which the probability value that will be a special result is assigned in the special figure variable display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value will be used in the game. There is. Here, six probability setting values “setting 1” to “setting 6” are prepared.

  When selecting the probability setting value, the probability setting value is set by turning on the power of the gaming machine while operating (depressing) the RAM initialization switch 112 with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position. Can be changed, and the probability setting value can be changed by operating (pressing) the RAM initialization switch 112 in the probability setting value changing mode. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and accessory ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays the probability setting value information while operating the probability setting value (while in the probability setting value changing mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode), and other than that. Displays the calculated base value and character ratio.

In addition, by turning on the power of the gaming machine with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position (the RAM initialization switch 112 is not operated), the currently selected probability set value is the performance display device. Although it is displayed in 153, the probability setting value confirmation mode in which the probability setting value cannot be changed is set. Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and is configured to display the probability setting value by numbers 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and may be any display mode in which the probability setting value can be recognized. Further, other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or the probability setting value may be indicated by the lighting mode or emission color of one or a plurality of LEDs.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out ball detection switch 32a) are transferred from the main board 100 to the relay board 70. It is also designed to be supplied to a test-firing test device (not shown). Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Is becoming

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 to assert the enable signal CE2 (change to a valid level). be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

  Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on a radio wave detected by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be accepted), a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (Signal output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 at a predetermined amount or more (full)), touch switch signal (input to the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) There is provided a first input port 122 which takes in a signal based on the above) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test shot test device via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124, 126 of the input section 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is performed so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test shooting test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in a game shop. It should be noted that the detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a start port switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor 61, the board radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as they are are once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, in the game. As an error signal indicating that the machine is not in the game control state, it is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test-shooting test apparatus through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test-shooting test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. There is. The chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-shooting test apparatus.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140. The second output port 134 is a first special winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the first special variation winning device 38, and a second big winning opening solenoid (large for opening the second special variation winning device 39). The winning port solenoid 2) 39b, the operation data of the lever solenoid 38f for operating the lever member in the first special variable winning device 38, and the universal electric solenoid 37c for opening the normal variable winning device 37 are output and are currently selected. It is a port for outputting the display data of the performance display device 153 that displays the probability setting value.
Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 for outputting ON / OFF data of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED is provided.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, for example. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the operation data signals of the special winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, the lever solenoid 38f, and the universal electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. A driver (driving circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON / OFF drive signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and a fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c that outputs an ON / OFF drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50, and an external information signal to be supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal board 71. The fourth driver 138d for output and the display data of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134. Fifth driver 138e is provided for receiving a data signal to generate a drive signal output. Data is transmitted from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e by serial communication.

The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. The fifth driver 138e is supplied with DC5V as the power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive the performance display device 153 operating at 5V.
Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line according to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential pulls out the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected in sequence and the LEDs are turned on.
The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided not on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the main board, but on the relay board 70 side.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit / receive data to / from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, 124, 126 are provided. Absent.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the winning opening switch 35a, the special winning opening switches 38a, 39a, the gate The switch 34a uses a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a magnetic detection coil and detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. Has been done. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the main frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 etc. are micro switches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The production control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 according to a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 including an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound in order to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  In the main control microcomputer 311, a program ROM 321 including a PROM (programmable read only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and a storage content that is retained even when power is not supplied during a power failure An FeRAM 323 that can be used and an RTC (real time clock) 338 that is a time counting unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to give a reproduced sound, lights a decorative lamp, and drives the motor. And drive control of solenoids and management of effect time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Also, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, a synchronization signal for giving a data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to INT and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as completion of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Via this command I / F331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300 are changed to the production control command signal (production command). ) As. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. There is.

  In addition, in the effect control device 300, the board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having the LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the glass frame 15 are provided. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances effect effects in cooperation with effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. It should be noted that the glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device including a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating an effect device), and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. Which detects the ON / OFF state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300. There is provided a switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting a signal of the above and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a direct current voltage of a desired level to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled by the same, and thus drives a motor and a solenoid. DC32V, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, DC5V serving as a power supply voltage for the command I / F 331, and a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker. Is configured to. Further, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 and puts the device in the reset state. In addition, in the form of being output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the tone generator LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET that drive and control the lamp and the motor). Signal) to put them in a reset state. In addition, the production control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 45 that cools each part of the gaming machine 10, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the production control device 300 is powered on.

  FIG. 5 shows the jackpot probability, the fall probability, the small hit probability, and the jackpot type distribution probability when the big hit is won. The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol), and when the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and special condition as a special electric accessory. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38, 39 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is operated). When the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term that is generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term that has different meanings.

The value of the big hit probability (probability value), which is the probability of being a big hit (first special result), is common in special figure 1 and special figure 2, and the probability value in the low probability state and the probability value in the high probability state are respectively The probability value is as shown in FIG.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, the same probability value is assigned as a probability value in the high probability state to all of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, but different probability values are set. A value may be assigned. That is, the probability value in the high probability state may be switchable in multiple stages.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, the same probability value is assigned to “setting 1” and “setting 2” as the probability value in the low probability state, but different probability values are set. It may be assigned. The same applies to “setting 3” and “setting 4” and “setting 5” and “setting 6”. That is, the number of stages is not limited as long as the probability value in the low probability state can be switched in multiple stages. In addition, the same probability value may be assigned as a probability value in the low probability state to all of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. That is, the probability value in the low probability state may not be switchable in multiple stages.

In addition, the effect distribution may be different between "setting 1" and "setting 2" in which the assigned probability values in the low probability state are the same. The same applies to “setting 3” and “setting 4” and “setting 5” and “setting 6”.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, six probability setting values (“setting 1” for three types of probability values (probability value in low probability state and probability value in high probability state)) "-" Setting 6 ") are assigned, but three probability setting values (for example," Setting 1 "-" Setting 3 ") are assigned to the three types of probability values, and the remaining three probability setting values (for example," Setting 6 ") are assigned. "Setting 4" to "Setting 6") may not be used.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in a special game state based on a big hit (first special game state), a game ball flows into a specific region (probability change operating region) of the first special variation winning device 38 and is detected by the specific region switch 38d. By doing (passing V), it becomes a high probability state after the end of the special game state, and becomes a low probability state when winning the falling lottery performed every time the special figure variation display game is executed. The probability of winning the falling lottery is as shown in FIG. 5 (b).
In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game, that is, the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, Both are in high probability states.

  The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), has a probability as shown in FIG. This small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. Also, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state or the big hit probability. In the big hit and small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit are not overlapped and won. In this embodiment, the small hit is not provided in the special figure 1 but only in the special figure 2, that is, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0, but the present invention is not limited to this. May be provided in both special figure 1 and special figure 2. Further, when the small hits are provided in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the small hit probability may be the same in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, or in the special figure 2 rather than the special figure 1. May be higher, or the special figure 1 may be higher than the special figure 2.

Further, FIG. 5D shows jackpot types selectable between Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 and the distribution probabilities of each jackpot type.
There are three types of big hits (first special results) in the special figure 1 variable display game: 10R certainty change big hits, 4R certainty change big hits, and 10R normal big hits. Similarly, there are three types of big hits (first special results) in the special figure 2 variable display game: 10R certainty change big hits, 4R certainty change big hits, and 10R normal big hits. These jackpot types are selected based on the jackpot random numbers. The number of each jackpot type shows the actual number of rounds, and the probability change indicates that the game ball is likely to flow into a specific area (probability change operation area) and tends to be in a high probability state (probability change state) after the special game state ends. , Normal indicates that a game ball is unlikely to flow into a specific area (probability change operation area) and is unlikely to be in a high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state.
Here, the actual number of rounds is the number of rounds in which opening control is performed so that a winning ball is actually generated by opening the special variation winning devices 38, 39. The number of each jackpot type is the number of rounds at the time of jackpot (the actual number of rounds + the number of rounds for which the opening time of the special variation winning devices 38, 39 is short and the winning control is not actually performed). May be.

Further, the first special result may be provided in which the possibility of the game ball flowing into the specific region is lower than that of the probability variation big hit, but the possibility of the game ball flowing into the specific region is higher than that of the normal big hit.
Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, whether or not a high probability state is reached is determined by whether or not a game ball flows into a specific area (probability change operation area), so even if the jackpot type is a certain change, it is specified. If the game ball does not flow into the area, the high probability state does not occur. Even if the big hit type is normal, if the game ball flows into the specific area, the high probability state occurs.

FIGS. 6 (a) to 6 (c) show an opening mode in each round in each jackpot type. Details of the opening mode are shown in FIG. 7.
As shown in FIG. 6 (a), in the 10R probability variation big hit, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened in the first round, and a V presence long opening for opening a specific area (probability variation operation area) is performed. The V open long open is an open mode in which the game ball is highly likely to flow into a specific area (probability change operation area). Then, after the second round, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened, and the V-free long opening is performed.
As shown in FIG. 6B, in the 4R probability variation big hit, the V special long opening is performed in which the first special variation winning device 38 is opened and the specific area (probability variation operation area) is opened in the first round. Then, from the second round to the fourth round, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened, and the V-long opening is performed, and after the fifth round, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened. Do not open the specified area. The V-less short opening is an opening mode in which the possibility of a game ball flowing into the special winning opening is lower than that of the V-free long opening. That is, the V-less long opening is an opening mode in which a winning ball is actually generated, and the V-less short opening is an opening mode in which an opening time is short and a winning ball is not actually generated.

As shown in FIG. 6C, in the 10R normal big hit, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened in the first round, and a V-shaped short-circuit opening for opening a specific area (probability change operation area) is performed. There is a possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific area (probability change operation area) with V, and the short opening is an opening mode lower than with V and the long opening. After the second round, the V-free long opening for opening the first special variation winning device 38 is performed.
The game balls can be allowed to flow into the specific area (probability change operation area) only in V-long open and V-short open which are performed in the first round. That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific round, which is a round in which the game ball may flow into the specific area, is the first round. The specific round is not limited to the first round and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the specific round may be repeated a plurality of times such as the first round and the fifth round.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, in the V-free long opening, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened at the start of the round (t11), and the openable time of 25000 msec has elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces). When any of the conditions for winning the game ball in (1) is satisfied, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed and the round is finished (t12). After that, the processing time for remaining balls in the upper special winning opening is started (t12), the interval time is started when the processing time for remaining upper special winning balls is finished (t13), and the next round is started when the interval time is ended (t14). ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

  As shown in FIG. 7B, in the V-long open, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t31). Further, with the start of the round, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on and the specific area switch 38d is enabled. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member covers the specific area and the game ball cannot enter, and when the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member retracts from the specific area and the game ball can enter. Becomes Further, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is valid is a state in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d is treated as valid. On the other hand, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which even if the specific area switch 38d detects a game ball, it is treated as invalid.

  The lever solenoid 38f is turned off when 64 msec has elapsed from the start of the round (t32). Then, 100 m seconds after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t33). That is, there is a possibility that the game ball won immediately after the first special variation winning device 38 is opened may flow into the specific area.

  When 200 msec has elapsed from the start of the round, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed (t34). Then, after the elapse of 2700 msec, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened again (t35), either the openable time of 25000 msec elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls are won. When the conditions are satisfied, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t39). After that, the processing time for processing the remaining balls of the special winning opening is started (t39), the interval time is started when the processing time of the remaining winning balls for the special winning opening is completed (t41), and the next round is started when the interval time is completed (t42). . In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

  Also, after the second opening of the first special variation winning device 38 (t35), the lever solenoid 38f is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). Also, the specific area switch 38d becomes effective (t36). The second opening of the first special variation winning device 38 is a sufficiently long time of opening and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f also continues for a long time, so that the game ball almost certainly flows into the specific area. Become. Therefore, when the type of jackpot is probable, it will almost certainly be a high-probability state.

  Further, the lever solenoid 38f can be kept in the ON state for a predetermined time even after the first special variation winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and flows into the first special variation winning device 38 just before closing. The game balls that have been played can also flow into a specific area. It should be noted that the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the elapse of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls winning, and the game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is a large winning hole remaining ball process. If all of them are discharged within the time, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off with the end of the remaining ball processing time (t41), the operation is ended, and the specific area switch 38d is invalidated.

In addition, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed due to the elapse of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls winning, and the game ball that has won the first special variation winning device 38 is the upper winning hole remaining ball processing time. When not completely discharged, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off at the end (t43) of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is turned on, and the lever solenoid 38f is turned off when the discharge is completed. And the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid.
In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the elapse of the openable time or the predetermined number of game balls winning, and the game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is the upper winning hole remaining ball processing time. If not all are discharged by the end of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43), the end of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43). Then, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation is completed. In this case, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t44) 100 msec after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43).

  As shown in FIG. 7C, in the V-opened short opening, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variable winning device 38 in the V-opened long opening is performed (t51 to t54), and the opening is completed. The round is finished based on (t54). The opening of the first special variation winning device 38 is for a very short time, and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f is also for a short time. Therefore, it is unlikely that the game ball will flow into the specific area. Therefore, a high probability state is rare when the type of jackpot is normal.

  In addition, the operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the valid / invalid switching of the specific area switch 38d are the same as those in the case of long opening with V as long as the game ball remains in the first special variation winning device 38 ( t55 to t63). Therefore, when the game ball remains in the first special variation winning device 38 even after the upper winning hole remaining ball processing time has elapsed, the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state at the time when the discharging of the remaining ball is completed. Then, the operation ends, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid. Further, if all the game balls are not discharged by the end of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t62), the lever solenoid 38f is turned OFF at the end of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t62). The specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t63) 100 msec after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t62) and the operation is completed.

  In addition, the first special variation winning device 38 first opening (t31 to t34) in the V present long opening shown in FIG. 7B and the first special variation in the V present short opening shown in FIG. 7C. The opening (t51 to t54) of the winning device 38 is set to an opening time such that at least one game ball can be won in the first special variation winning device 38.

  As shown in FIG. 7D, in the V-less short opening, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened at the start of the round (t71), and a 200 msec openable time has elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces). When any of the conditions for winning the game ball in (1) is satisfied, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed and the round is finished (t72). However, since the openable time is short, it is rare that a predetermined number of winnings, which are the closing conditions, are generated, and in most cases, the prize is closed as the openable time elapses. After that, the processing time for processing the remaining sphere of the special winning opening is started (t72), the interval time is started when the processing time of the remaining sphere for the upper winning opening is completed (t73), and the next round is started when the interval time is completed (t74). ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

  Further, FIG. 6D shows an opening state in the second special game state (special game state based on small hit). In the second special game state, first, the small hit fanfare time is started, and when the small hit fanfare time is finished, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, and the openable time of 1600 msec elapses or a predetermined number (eg, The second special variation winning device 39 is closed when any of the conditions of winning nine (9) game balls is established. After that, when the small hit remaining ball processing time is started and the small hit remaining ball processing time is ended, the small hit ending time is started, and when the small hit ending time is ended, the second special game state is ended. It should be noted that there may be a plurality of types of opening / closing modes (opening time and number of times of opening) in the second special game state, in which case, which opening / closing mode is set (adopted) is determined based on, for example, a small hit symbol. .

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (shift) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 8: is a figure which illustrates the game state transition diagram (game flow) which shows the transition of the game state in this embodiment.
The gaming state includes a normal gaming state ST1, a first specific gaming state ST2, and a second specific gaming state ST3. In addition to this, as special game states, there are a first special game state based on a first special result (big hit) and a second special game state based on a second special result (small hit), but they are omitted here. In each game state, the special figure probability that the first special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, the production mode that is controlled by the production control device 300 to determine the production mode of the game, and is mainly in the game state. The main starting area which is the starting area to be aimed at, the main variation special figure which is the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed mainly, and the shooting direction of the game ball are defined.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim at winning at the starting winning port 36 by left-handed striking, and at the normal variable winning device 37 by right-handed striking. That is, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's intention. Further, in each gaming state, it is designed assuming that one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game mainly advances the game, and the player plays the game according to this design. It is configured such that it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game mainly in the one special figure variation display game that is determined to be the main one in the design so as to proceed. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each gaming state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

  In the normal gaming state ST1, the special figure probability is a low probability state, and there is no special electric power support for improving the opening time per unit time of the normal variation winning device 37 to facilitate the winning, and there is no special figure variation display game or normal This is a state in which there is no time reduction for reducing the variation time of the figure variation display game. Further, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is the normal mode. The main variation special figure is a special figure 1 variation display game, and the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed to aim at this starting winning opening 36. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the main variation, and the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be the irregular variation. In this normal gaming state ST1, a very long variation time is set for the special figure 2 variation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in time, and the player is prevented from selecting the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming to win a small hit in the normal gaming state ST1. ..

  The second specific game state ST3 is a state where the special figure probability is basically low. However, when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability change operation area) of the first special variation winning device 38 (when there is V passage) in the special game state based on the normal jackpot, the state becomes a high probability state. In addition, there is a general electric power support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is support for POD, it will also be possible to shorten the fluctuation time of the special map variable display game and the PPU variable display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the chance mode. Further, the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the ordinary variable winning apparatus 37, and the aiming direction is the right-handed striking in order to aim at this ordinary variable winning apparatus 37. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be the main variation, and the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the irregular variation.

  In the first specific game state ST2, the special figure probability is a high-probability state, and there is no ordinary electric power support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variation winning device 37 to facilitate the winning, and there is no special figure variation display game. It is in a state where there is a reduction in the time required to reduce the fluctuation time. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is small hit RUSH. Further, the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the ordinary variable winning apparatus 37, and the aiming direction is the right-handed striking in order to aim at this ordinary variable winning apparatus 37. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be the main variation, and the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the irregular variation.

In the present embodiment, the probability that the hit result of the universal figure variation display game in the state with the universal communication support is the same probability as the state without the universal communication support (normal probability). Without being limited to the above, it is possible to set the universal figure probability to a high probability (typical figure high probability state) higher than the normal probability (typical figure low probability state) in a state where there is universal communication support.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the state in which there is no ordinary electric power support means that the ordinary variable prize device 37 is opened, but the opening time per unit time of the ordinary variable prize device 37 is shorter than that in the state where the ordinary electric prize support is provided. is there.

In the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is shortened compared to the case of the normal game state ST1, and right-handed to perform the normal variation winning device 37. It is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at The special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of small hits than the special figure 1 variable display game (in the case of the present embodiment, the small hit probability of special figure 1 is 0), and the small hits are won rather than the big hits. Since the probability of doing is high, small hits occur frequently in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3.
When the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, the state with the universal electric support continues even in the special game state based on the small hit, and in the first specific game state ST2. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the state without normal electric power support continues even in the special game state based on the small hit. In the special game state based on the small hit, the second special variation winning device 39 is opened, but the first special variation winning device 38 is not opened (see FIG. 6 (d)).

Therefore, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, in the special game state based on the small hit, most of the right-handed game balls are ordinary variation prizes. The device 37 is won and does not flow down to the second special variable winning device 39 arranged below the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, in the second specific game state ST3, a small hit occurs frequently, but it is difficult to increase the player's ball with the small hit.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the first specific game state ST2, in the special game state based on the small hit, most of the right-handed game balls are ordinary variation prizes. Instead of winning the prize in the device 37, it flows down to the second special variable prize device 39 arranged below the normal variable prize device 37. Therefore, in the first specific game state ST2, it is easy to increase the game balls of the player by a small hit. That is, in the first specific game state ST2, a small hit occurs frequently and the player's ball increases, so the effect mode is a mode called small hit RUSH.

  Of these three game states, the normal game state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The second specific game state ST3 is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1 because it has a universal electric support. The first specific game state ST2 is a high-probability state, and because the player's ball is increased due to frequent small hits, the player is more likely than the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3. It is in an advantageous state.

The transition of the game state is performed by ending the first special game state based on the derivation of the first special result, consuming the prescribed number of games, and winning the falling lottery that is the transition lottery to the low probability state. .. Basically, the probability variation big hit is derived and becomes the first special game state, and in the first special game state, the game ball flows into the specific region (probability variation operation region) of the first special variation winning device 38 to switch the specific region. When it is detected at 38d (when there is V passage), after the end of the first special game state, the process moves to the first specific game state ST2. On the other hand, if the probability variation big hit is derived and becomes the first special game state, and the game ball does not flow into the specific region (probability variation operation region) of the first special variation winning device 38 in the first special game state (no V passage) In the case of), after the end of the first special game state, it shifts to the normal game state ST1. In addition, the normal big hit is derived and becomes the first special game state, and if there is no V passage in the first special game state, after the end of the first special game state, the second specific game state ST3 (special figure low probability The game proceeds to the second specific game state ST3). On the other hand, if the normal jackpot is derived and becomes the first special game state, and there is V passage in the first special game state, after the end of the first special game state, the second specific game state ST3 (special figure high probability The game proceeds to the second specific game state ST3).
In the second specific game state ST3, when the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, the normal game state ST1 is entered. In addition, when the falling lottery is won in the first specific game state ST2, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. Further, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. Further, when the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply called a hit (special result). Further, when the first special game state, which is a special game state based on a big hit, and the second special game state, which is a special game state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special game state.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is performed by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) toward a game area 32 from a hitting ball launching device (not shown). The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the universal figure starting gate 34 and the general winning opening 351. ~ 354, the start winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39, or flowing into the outlet 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 It is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning openings 351 to 354, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning apparatus 37, the first special variation winning apparatus 38, or the second special variation winning apparatus 39, depending on the type of the winning opening. A large number of prize balls are discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the launching force and shoots a game ball to the left-side game area (so-called left hitting) so that the starting winning opening 36 or the left side of the starting winning opening 36. It is possible to aim for winning at the provided general winning openings 353, 354, and by launching a game ball to the right-side game area (so-called right hitting), the universal figure starting gate 34, the ordinary variation winning device 37, the first special The variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, and the general winning openings 351 and 352 can be aimed at.

  Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, there is provided a gate switch 34a including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34, and is driven into the game area 32. When the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the number of memory for starting normal figure is the upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces) based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal starting gate 34. If less than), the number of ordinary figure starting memory is added (+1) and one ordinary figure starting memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of memories of the universal figure starting prize is displayed on the universal figure hold indicator 56 of the collective display device 50. Further, the universal figure starting memory stores a hit determination random number value (per random number value) for determining the result of the universal figure variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a. It is supposed to be done.

  Then, if there is a general figure starting memory and the general figure variable display game can be started, that is, the general figure variable display game is not running, the general figure variable display game hits and the normal variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If the hit state is not the hit state, the hit determination random number value stored in the normal figure starting memory stored first is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit state of the variable figure display game. Then, the process of starting the universal figure variation display game is performed. When the random number for hit determination coincides with the determination value, the general figure variable display game becomes a win and a specific result mode (normal figure specification result) is derived.

  Further, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns for a predetermined variation time in the universal figure display unit 58 provided in the collective display device 50 as a process of executing the universal figure variation display game. After performing the universal figure changing display which is repeatedly displayed in the given order, the processing of displaying the universal figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. It should be noted that the public figure display unit 58 is configured by the display device 41, and, for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, which is variably displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed so that the result is displayed. It may be configured.

  When the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, the universal pattern prize is displayed on the universal figure display portion 58 while the special result mode is stopped and displayed, and the universal electric solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member of the ordinary variation winning device 37. Control to open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) is performed. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). In addition, when the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is off, control is performed to display a lighting pattern on the general figure display unit 58 as a result mode of the misalignment.

  The winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided inside. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first starting memory which is the starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4). In addition to being stored, the second starting memory, which is a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37, is stored within a predetermined upper limit (for example, four). On the basis of the winning to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, a big hit random number value, a big hit pattern random number value, and each variation pattern random value are extracted as the starting memory information, respectively, and the extracted random numbers. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first starting memory or the second starting memory. Then, the number of memories of this start memory is the first memory display section 53 (special figure 1 reserved display) and the second memory display section 54 (special figure 2 reserved display) for notifying the number of starting prizes of the collective display device 50. And the display device 41 of the center case 40 also displays as a decoration special figure starting memory display.

  The game control device 100 plays the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 (first variation display device) based on the first starting memory, and the special figure 2 display device 52 (based on the second starting memory). A special figure 2 variable display game is played on the second variable display device). The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but while one special figure variable display game is being executed, the other special figure variable display game has the first special result (big hit). In such a case, the one special figure variation display game is ended as a result (disappearance result) other than the special result. In addition, when one of the special figure variation display games is the second special result (small hit) during the execution of the one special figure variation display game, the other one until the special game state based on the small hit is finished. The special figure variable display game is interrupted.

  That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area). It constitutes a first execution control means for controlling. In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 of the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable prize device 37 (second start prize area). It constitutes second execution control means for performing execution control.

  In the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, after performing the variable display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state). When the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the special result mode (the small hit result mode) in which the display mode of the special map 1 display 51 or the special map 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result It becomes a small hit and becomes the second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display 51 constitutes a first variable display means capable of displaying the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening 36. In addition, the special figure 2 display 52 constitutes a second variation display means capable of displaying a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37.

  In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100, after the end of the big hit game state (first special game state), is in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the probability of hit is high, or the normal electric It is possible to perform control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can be advanced with the support. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 constitutes a specific game state generation means.

  In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, a decoration special figure variation in which a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) is variably displayed on the display device 41 The display game is now running. The decoration special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decoration special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decoration special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. Yes, these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variable display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed along with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

  That is, the display device 41 variably displays the decoration identification information corresponding to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). A decorative variable display means for displaying a decorative special figure variable display game). Note that different display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one decorative special figure variable display game may be displayed. Further, the special machine 1 display 51 and the special machine 2 display 52 may not be provided in the gaming machine 10, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability of the small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game is higher (the probability of the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is 0), but it is special in the normal gaming state. FIG. 2 As the variation pattern of the variation display game, a long variation having a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in time in the normal game state, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming to win the small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the left and hit the start winning opening 36 to play the special figure 1 variable display game.
The time for long fluctuation is set to about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.). Further, the time of long fluctuation may be changed according to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game. Specifically, for example, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a miss or a small hit, a long variation of about 10 minutes is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game, When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, a long variation of about 5 minutes may be selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 performed at a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 9, first, a process of prohibiting an interrupt (step X1) is performed, and then a stack pointer which is a top address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting is performed. Next, the register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (eg D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order, and the leading 00h is set in step X4. Next, a signal to stop firing is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the firing, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

  After that, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and a process for setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, by setting a predetermined initial value, a sub-control unit (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from the game control device 100 that is the main control unit. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the command is sent to the slave control device before the game control device 100 starts up first and the slave control devices (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) start up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

  Further, the power-on delay timer counts time using a storage area (RAM area or register, which is not the target of validity determination) that is not the target of RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, and thus it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). If a power failure has occurred (step X8; Y), the power supply of the gaming machine is determined. Wait for the cutoff.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the number of times (for example, twice) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. Determine if there is. Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the set number of checks. Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X57 described later. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of power failure due to noise, etc. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a malfunction at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents when the power was last turned off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if no power failure has occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10). When the value of the timer is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process (step X8) of determining whether a power failure has occurred. When the value of the timer is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, when the waiting time is over, access is permitted to the read / write memory (RWM) such as RAM or EEPROM (step S10). X11), OFF data is output to all output ports (set to no output) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X13), and the gaming microcomputer is set. A process (step X14) of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.
Then, the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, the RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register on the assumption that the RAM has abnormality regardless of whether the RAM has abnormality.

Next, it is judged whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step X16), and if the value is normal (step X16; Y), the power failure inspection in the RWM is performed. It is determined whether the value of the area 2 is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), a checksum calculation process (step X18) for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed, and the calculated checksum and power-off It is determined whether the checksums of the two match (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y)
Since there is no abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20), and the process proceeds to step X21.

  Further, if it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), and if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step X19; N), the step is performed. Based on the state read in X6, it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state (step X21). When at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), there is an abnormality in the RAM, so a command for main abnormality error notification for notifying that the game control device 100 is abnormal is produced on the control board (production control). Device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). When the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), the main abnormality error notification command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag set here is a probability setting flag set before the occurrence of a power failure. That is, when the power supply of the game machine is cut off and restarted during the change of the probability setting value, the operation of the game control device 100 is stopped, and therefore the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X25). As a result, the performance display device 153 displays as shown in FIG. After that, the ON data of the security signal is output and the OFF data of signals other than the security signal are output (step X26), and the process returns to step X25.

If both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X27; N), the probability setting changing flag is set (step X29). As a result, the probability setting value change mode is entered. After that, the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. In the production control device 300, on the basis of receiving the command of changing the probability setting, the display of the display device 41, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, the speakers 19a, 19b. Is output to notify that the probability setting value is being changed.
On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), the probability setting value is cleared (step X28). As a result, 0 is set in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes “setting 1”. After that, the processes of steps X29 and X30 are performed, and the process proceeds to step X31.

  Further, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the OFF state (step X21; N), and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (step X22; N and step X23). ; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). Then, if the setting key switch 152 is not in the on state (step X35; N), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the on state based on the state read in step X6 (step X44).

When it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not in the on state (step X44; N), that is, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the off state, the process proceeds to step X41 and the power failure occurs. Perform the processing when it is restored normally.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the on state (step X44; Y), the process proceeds to step X45 to perform initialization processing. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Form a means of conversion.

  If the setting key switch 152 is in the on state (step X35; Y), the probability setting confirmation flag is set (step X36). As a result, the mode shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode. Then, the command for which the probability setting is being confirmed is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X37). In the production control device 300, on the basis of receiving the command for confirming the probability setting, the display of the display device 41, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, the speakers 19a and 19b. The notification that the probability setting value is being confirmed is issued by, for example, outputting a voice.

  Then, in order to guarantee the output of the security signal for 50 msec or more, the value corresponding to 128 msec is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X126) of the timer interrupt process in the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, and in other cases, the external information of the timer interrupt process is edited. It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, when the probability setting value changing mode or the probability setting value confirming mode ends in less than 128 msec, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing processing (step X120) of the timer interrupt processing. That is, even if the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 msec, the security signal is output for 128 msec after the mode is changed to the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode. It The value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 msec. However, since it is necessary to output the security signal for at least 50 msec after shifting to the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 msec or more.

Then, interruption is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33). In step X33, the determination is not made based on the state (state at power-on) read in step X6, but is changed to the state (current state) read in the input process (step X103) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). Judgment based on If it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the off state, the probability setting value is confirmed.
If the setting key switch 152 is not in the off state (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X34), and if no power failure has occurred (step X34; N), the procedure proceeds to step X33. Returning to this, when a power failure has occurred (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X58. When it is determined in step X34 that a power failure has occurred with the probability setting changing flag set, in step X23 of the main process (FIGS. 9 and 10) after recovery from the power failure, It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33; Y), a process of inhibiting interruption (step X38) is performed. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec) between the process of permitting the interrupt (step X32) and the process of inhibiting the interrupt (steps X38, X58). .. In the timer interrupt processing, probability setting change / confirmation processing (step X126), which is processing relating to the probability setting value, is performed. That is, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability setting value is completed (or a power failure occurs).
Next, a command to end the notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X39). The effect control device 300 ends the notification in progress (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification indicating that the probability setting value is being confirmed) based on the reception of the notification end command. ..

  Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, when the probability setting confirming flag is set. Performs a power failure recovery process (step X41) that performs a process of saving the initial value at the time of power recovery in an area to be initialized (for example, a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring). The probability setting confirmation flag is cleared in step X41.

  After that, the contents of the initial display setting flag area for storing the initial display setting flag for causing the performance display device 153 to perform the initial display at power-on are referred to (read out), and if the state is not set, the initial display setting flag is set. Is set (written) (step X42). As a result, the initial display setting flag is turned on. Then, a command for power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game process number is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X43), and the process proceeds to step X50. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X43, a plurality of model designation commands, probability setting information commands, special figure 1 hold number commands, special figure 2 hold number commands, probability information commands, effect count information commands, screen designation commands, etc. Send a command. As the command for screen designation, if both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in the normal processing described later, that is, if the special figure change display game is not being executed and the special game state is not being waited for, Send the command on the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command on the recovery screen. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a high-probability-number-of-times information command or the like is also transmitted.

  On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM areas other than the probability setting value are cleared to 0 (step X45). In step X45, the RAM area for the probability setting value (work area (1 byte area of the probability setting value)) and the RAM area for displaying performance (displaying the base value and accessory ratio) (work area and stack area) are cleared. Instead, the RAM area for the game control (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0. Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared in step X45. In step X45, the stack area and the unused area may or may not be cleared.

  Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X46). The area to be initialized here is the customer waiting demonstration area and the area related to the setting of the effect mode. Next, the normal base state information is saved (written) in the normal base state determination flag area that stores the normal base state information indicating the normal game state that is neither the special game state nor the specific game state (step X47), The contents of the initial display setting flag area are referred (read), and if not set, the initial display setting flag is set (written) (step X48). As a result, the initial display setting flag is turned on. Then, the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X49). In the case of the present embodiment, in step X49, a model designation command, a probability setting information command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, an effect count information command, a RAM initialization command (customer wait While displaying the demo screen, a plurality of commands such as a command to notify the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a support number information command, a support number information command that is information on the number of times the special figure variation display game with normal electric power support is executed, and the like are also transmitted.

  Next, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X50). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposed pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. The bit transposition pattern is the method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangement (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). Is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may set it arbitrarily.

  After that, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining the winning symbol of the special drawing). (Big hit symbol random number, Small hit symbol random number), Random number that determines the hit of a general figure (hit number), RWM as the initial value (start value) of the random number that determines whether to win the falling lottery (falling lottery random number) After saving the data in the predetermined area (step X51), the interrupt is permitted (step X52). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step X53) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. Is configured. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are processed by the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as the unit of timer interrupt processing. In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number, the so-called "initial value change method" that changes the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round Is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter method by +1 or -1, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.
In addition, in the present embodiment, since there is no random number for determining the hit symbol of the universal figure (hit symbol random number), there is only one type of hit symbol of the universal symbol, but the hit symbol of the universal symbol is provided by providing the hit symbol random number. May be selected from a plurality of types.

  After the initial value random number updating process of step X53, a process of inhibiting interruption (step X54) is performed, and a performance display editing process (step X55) is performed. Then, after performing the process of permitting interruption (step X56), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (step X57), and if no power failure has occurred (step X57; N), an initial value random number updating process Return to (Step X53). That is, when no power failure has occurred, a loop process is performed in which the initial value random number updating process, the performance display editing process, and the power failure monitoring are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step X52) before the initial value random number updating process (step X53), when a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt process by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  In addition to the main processing, the initial value random number updating processing in step X53 includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating processing in the timer interrupt processing as well. In order to prevent the random number update process from being executed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update the interrupt to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and only within the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update processing, which simplifies the main processing. The advantage is that

On the other hand, if a power failure has occurred (step X57; Y), a process of temporarily interrupting (step X58) and a process of outputting off data to all output ports (step X59) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X60), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X61). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X62) for calculating the checksum at the time of power-off of the RWM and a process (step X63) for saving the calculated checksum, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X64). ), Wait until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power shutdown was correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and the secondary control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), And the main control means delays the start of the main control means when the power is turned on and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting the start of the slave control device (a game control device). 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring occurrence of power failure during the predetermined standby time.
In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100), RAM111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. It is provided with an initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the above, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.
Further, the main control means (game control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine started at a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 11 is started.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step X101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing the register saving process of moving the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (eg D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step X103) is performed.

Then, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting confirming flag is set (step X104), and when the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting confirming flag is set (step X104; Y). The probability setting change / confirmation process (step X126) is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.
On the other hand, when neither the probability setting changing flag nor the probability setting confirming flag is set (step X104; N), the solenoids (special winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) are output based on the output data set in various processes. , The lever solenoid 38f, the universal solenoid 37c) and other actuators are output-controlled (step X105). When the firing stop signal is output in step X5 of the main processing, the firing processing is performed to output the firing permission signal, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the launch permission state as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (shooting permission signal) indicating the launch permission state as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the firing control device. That is, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both of them are allowed to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step X106) of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer to the payout control device 200 by various processes, a random number update process 1 (step X107), and a random number update process 2 (step X108). After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switches 35a to 35c, and the special winning opening switches 38a, 39a, setting of a prize ball, front frame A winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step X109) is performed for monitoring errors such as opening the glass frame, opening the glass frame, and fraudulent winning of the regular variable prize device 37 and the special variable prize devices 38 and 39.

  Next, it is determined whether abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that in the first special variation winning device 38, the number of game balls discharged from the first special variation winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e) is It is to exceed the number of game balls (the number of game balls detected by the special winning opening switch 38a) flowing into the first special variation winning device 38. If abnormal discharge is occurring, the abnormal discharge flag is set. If abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from proceeding.

  On the other hand, when the abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), the starting opening switch monitoring processing (step X111) for monitoring the winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37. Then, a special figure 1 game process (step X112) that performs a process related to the special figure 1 variable display game, a special figure 2 game process (step X113) that performs a process related to the special figure 2 variable display game, and a process related to the general figure variable display game. The segment LED which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and which performs the normal figure game process (step X114) and which displays the special figure variable display game and various information regarding the game is driven to display the desired content. Edit processing (step X115) is performed.

  Next, a magnet irregularity monitoring process (step X116) for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 to determine whether there is an abnormality, and a process for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is any abnormality Illegal vibration monitoring process (step X117) for performing the board radio frequency monitoring process (step X117), a process for checking a detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 to determine whether there is any abnormality, and a determination whether abnormal discharge has occurred The abnormal discharge monitoring process (step X119) is performed. Further, an external information editing process (step X120) of setting signals to be output to various external devices is performed, the flag register is saved (step X121), and a performance display monitor control process regarding control of the performance display device 153 is performed. (Step X122) is performed.

  Then, the flag register is restored (step X123), and it is determined whether the initial display setting flag is on (step X124). If the initial display setting flag is not on (step X124; N), the timer interrupt processing ends. If the initial display setting flag is on (step X124; Y), the initial display setting flag is cleared (set to the off state) (step X125), and the timer interrupt process ends.

  Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by interrupt return. At this time (at the end of timer interrupt processing), it is automatically performed. Depending on the CPU to be used, there is also a gaming machine in which it is necessary to instruct execution of a process of restoring the interrupt prohibited state or a process of restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
FIG. 12 shows the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X126) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In this probability setting change / confirmation processing, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is within the normal range (the range of 0 to 5 in this embodiment) (step X131).
If the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is within the normal range (step X131; Y), the probability setting corresponding to the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM (current probability setting value) The value display data is set (step X132), and the probability setting value display data is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X134). As a result, the performance display device 153 displays as shown in FIGS. 13 (a) to 13 (f).
On the other hand, when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is not within the normal range (step X131; N), the extinction data is set as the probability setting value display data (step X133), and the probability setting value display is performed. The data is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X134). As a result, the performance display device 153 displays as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13, the performance display device 153 includes four 7-segment display devices (7-segment type display devices) arranged side by side. During the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, the rightmost 7 segment display among the four 7 segment display shows the current probability set value, and the remaining 7 segment display shows “SET”. “” Is indicated.
Specifically, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is “0”, the current probability setting value is “setting 1”, and therefore the rightmost 7 is set as shown in FIG. When “1” is displayed on the segment indicator and the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is “1”, the current probability setting value is “setting 2”, and therefore, in FIG. As shown, "7" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display, and when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "2", the current probability setting value is "setting 3". As shown in FIG. 13C, when “3” is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display and the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is “3”, the current probability setting value is “set”. Since it is 4 "," 4 "is displayed on the 7-segment indicator at the right end as shown in FIG. 13D, and the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is" 4 ". If the current probability setting value is “setting 5”, “5” is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 13E, and the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is displayed. If the value of is "5", the current probability setting value is "setting 6", so "6" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 13 (f). When the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is outside the normal range (abnormal value), the 7-segment indicator at the right end is turned off as shown in FIG. 13 (g).
For example, when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "0", the probability setting value display data is "1" in the first digit, "T" in the second digit, and "T" in the third digit. Probability setting value display data for instructing to display "E" and "S" at the fourth digit is output to the fifth driver 138e.

Next, if the security signal control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step X135). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set in step X31 of the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0".
Then, the ON data of the security signal is output and the OFF data of the signals other than the security signal are output (step X136). In step X136, ON data of the security signal is output regardless of whether or not the security signal control timer is up. Therefore, the security signal is continuously output during the probability setting value changing mode and the probability setting value confirming mode (while the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirming flag are set).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X137; N), that is, when the probability setting confirming flag is set. Ends the probability setting change / confirmation process. On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137; Y), the probability setting changing / confirming process being executed is the probability setting changing / checking in the first timer interrupt process after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. It is determined whether it is a confirmation process (step X138).

  If it is the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X138; Y), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X138; N), it is determined whether there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139). In step X139, when the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected in the immediately preceding input process (step X103), it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112. If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; N), the probability setting change / confirmation processing ends.

On the other hand, when there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; Y), that is, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is newly operated, the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is set to 0. +1 is updated in the range of 5 (step X140), and the probability setting change / confirmation processing is ended. The value updated in step X140 (updated probability setting value) is displayed on the performance display device 153 by the next probability setting change / confirmation process.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, “setting 1” to “setting 6” for three types of probability values (probability value in low probability state and probability value in high probability state). However, for example, “setting 1” to “setting 3” may be assigned to three types of probability values (probability value in low probability state and probability value in high probability state). In this case, in step X140, the value of the area for the probability setting value of RWM is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 2.

By operating the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, it is possible to shift to the probability setting value change mode, and the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated during the probability setting value change mode. You can change the probability setting value with.
Since the RAM initialization switch 112 can only be pressed, it is impossible to distinguish between the transition operation for transitioning to the probability set value changing mode and the change operation for changing the probability set value. Therefore, when the transition operation (the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that has caused the transition to the probability setting value change mode) continues during the probability setting value change mode, that is, when the power is turned on. When 112 is kept pressed, the probability setting value is updated (changed) according to the operation, even though the operation is the transition operation.

  Specifically, in the input process (step X103) of the timer interrupt process, the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the previous input process is the off state, and the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the current input process is When the state is the ON state, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected. In the input process (step X103) in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on, the input process immediately before the power is turned off is the previous input process, and the input process immediately after the power is turned is the current input process. The state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read by the processing is likely to be the off state. That is, when the transition operation continues even during the probability setting value change mode, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is input in the input processing (step X103) in the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on. ) Is likely to be detected. Therefore, in this case, when the processing of steps X139 and 140 is performed in the probability setting change / confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 based on the transfer operation, There is a possibility that the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is updated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to avoid such an inconvenience, the processing of step X138 is performed, and the processing of steps X139 and X140 is not performed in the probability setting change / confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on. I will. As a result, for updating (changing) the probability setting value, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that has been continued since the power was turned on (that is, the RAM initialization switch 112 that has caused the transition to the probability setting value changing mode). Since the input signal (rising edge) based on (operation of) is ignored, it is possible to prevent unintended update.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is the first gaming machine capable of generating the special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a special result. An operation unit (setting key operation unit), a second operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112), and a storage unit that stores one probability setting value among a plurality of probability setting values to which a probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned. (Game control device 100 (RAM 111C)) and a mode in which the probability setting value is changed to a probability setting value changing mode in response to the operation of the first operation unit and the second operation unit when the game machine is powered on. In response to the operation of the transition means (game control device 100) and the second operation unit in the probability setting value change mode, the probability setting value (the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM) stored in the storage means. ) Change Setting change means (game control device 100), and operation of the second operation unit for shifting to the probability set value change mode (shift operation), and operation of the second operation unit for changing the probability set value (Change operation) is the same operation (in the case of the present embodiment, a pressing operation), and the setting change means continues from the power-on of the gaming machine even during the probability set value change mode. It is configured not to respond to the operation of the two operation units.
Therefore, if the operation (transition operation) of the second operation unit that is performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on continues even after the transition to the probability setting value changing mode, the probability setting value is not changed during that time, which is not intended It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed.

[Winning prize switch / status monitoring processing]
FIG. 14 shows a winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step X109) in the timer interrupt process. In this winning a prize switch / state monitoring process, first, the winning a prize monitoring table 1 corresponding to the special winning a prize switch 38a of the first special variable winning a prize device 38 is prepared (step X301), and the first special variable award winning device 38 is opened. If there is no winning, the fraud & winning monitoring process (step X302) is executed to monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening and detect a normal winning. After that, the prize-winning port monitoring table 2 corresponding to the special winning port switch 39a in the second special variable winning device 39 is prepared (step X303), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning, and a normal winning is detected. The monitoring process (step X304) is executed.

  In the winning hole monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of the fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the fraudulent winning number area, the fraudulent winning error notification command, the fraudulent winning The number upper limit value (the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the information of the notification timer update information (permission / update) are defined. In addition to the number of times the monitoring is repeated (the number of switches), the winning table of the winning port monitoring table includes a monitoring switch bit, a lower address of the winning number counter area 1, and a winning number counter area 2 for each switch. The information of the lower address of is defined. The prize hole monitoring table is prepared in accordance with each switch to be monitored.

  Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in Hoden (step X305), monitor whether there is an illegal winning, and detect fraud & winning processing to detect a normal winning. (Step X306) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switches (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the winning opening switches 35a to 35c of the general winning openings 351 to 354) that can always win (no need for fraudulent monitoring processing) is prepared (step X307). ), The winning number counter updating process (step X308) for updating the winning number is performed, and the starting opening error monitoring process (step X309) is performed.

  Next, the state scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals whose states should be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step X310). In the case of this embodiment, the status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. After that, the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the status scan counter (step X311). Then, a gaming machine status check process (step X312) for determining a status such as whether an error has occurred.

  In the case of the present embodiment, by referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, if the value of the status scan counter is “0”, the switch abnormality output due to occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like Monitoring of the state based on the 1 signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, monitoring of the state based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. It

  Next, the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the status scan counter (step X313). Then, a gaming machine status check process (step X314) for determining a status such as whether an error has occurred is performed. In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, and when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, it is based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch 63. State monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "1", state monitoring is set based on the signal output from the main frame opening detection switch 64. When the value of the status scan counter is “2”, the status monitoring based on the frame radio wave incorrect signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is “3”, the status monitoring based on the touch switch signal is monitored. Is set.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step X315). If the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step X315; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is executed. finish. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step X315; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step X316), and the gaming machine determines the status such as whether an error has occurred. A state check process (step X317) is performed.

  In the case of the present embodiment, by referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is "0", the switch abnormality output due to occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like Two signal based condition monitoring is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is "1" to "3".

  Then, the payout control device 200 performs a payout busy signal check process (step X318) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control can be started, and ends the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. Since the processing of steps X316 to X318 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is "0", it is executed once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 msec, the processes of steps X316 to X318 are performed every 16 msec.

[Illegal & prize monitoring processing]
FIG. 15 shows the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process (steps X302, X304, X306) in the above-described winning a prize switch / state monitoring process. This fraudulent & winning prize monitoring processing is performed for the special winning opening switch 38a of the first special variation winning device 38, the special winning opening switch 39a of the second special variation winning device 39, and the starting opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variation winning device 37. This is the process performed. Regarding the special winning opening (first special variation winning device 38, second special variation winning device 39) and Hoden (normal variation winning device 37), open and close the opening and closing member forcibly to insert the game ball and pay out the prize ball. Since fraud is liable to occur, fraud is monitored in addition to winning detection.

  In the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning combination switch to be error monitored is checked (step X321), and it is determined whether the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step X322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special game state in which the first special variable winning device 39 is opened when the winning port switch targeted for error monitoring is the special winning port switch 38a, and the winning port switch targeted for error monitoring. Is a special winning opening switch 39a, it is a period other than during the special game state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, and if the winning opening switch to be monitored for error is the starting opening 2 switch 37a, It is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 is executed based on the winning.

  Then, if it is during the fraud monitoring period (step X322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; Y), the target number of illegal prizes is updated by +1 (step X324), and the updated number of illegal prizes is equal to or more than the number of fraud occurrence determinations of the monitoring target. It is determined whether there is any (step X325).

  In the case of the present embodiment, the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations is set to 5 regardless of the type of winning hole switch that is the object of error monitoring, but the number of fraudulent occurrences defines a different number for each type of winning hole switch. You can also The determination number is set to five, for example, when the big winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the big winning opening, and the game ball is in the effective period of the big winning opening switch. This is to prevent it from being determined to be illegal when the player has won a prize after passing or when there is noise on the signal, and to not easily determine that it is an error although it is not illegal.

  Then, when the number of fraudulent winning prizes is not equal to or more than the fraudulent occurrence determination number of monitoring targets (step X325; N), the winning prize port monitoring table of the target winning port switch is prepared (step X330). The prize-winning switch monitoring table (fraud monitoring table) prepared in the prize-winning switch / state monitoring process, the monitoring switch bit indicating the position of the data for determining whether there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of the fraud monitoring information , The lower address of the illegal prize number area, the illegal prize error notification command, the illegal prize upper limit value (the number of illegal occurrence judgments), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the information of the notification timer update information (permission / update) are defined. .

  If the number of fraudulent prizes is equal to or larger than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations to be monitored (step X325; Y), the number of fraudulent prizes is kept at the fraudulent occurrence determination number (step X326), and the initial value is set in the target fraudulent prize notification timer area. Save (for example, 60000 ms) (step X327). Next, a target fraud command is prepared (step X328), a fraud prize generation flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step X329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340). ).

  On the other hand, when the fraud monitoring period is not in progress (step X322; N), the prize-winning port monitoring table of the target prize-winning port switch is prepared (step X330), and the winning number counter updating process (step X331) for setting the prize ball is performed. To do. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332), and if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X334). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.

  After that, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step X335). If the value is not 0 (step X335; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process is ended. When the value is 0 (step X335; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the target fraud cancellation command is prepared (step X336), and the fraud prize cancellation flag is set as the fraud flag. Prepare (step X337). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338).

  If it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; Y), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in this fraud & prize monitoring process, the number of illegal prizes of interest is cleared ( (Step X339), the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340). If it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & prize monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value in the fraud flag area (step X340).

  Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step X340; Y), the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process ends. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step X341), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X342), the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process ends. By the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an incorrect prize winning error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, and the start and end of error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning prize counter update process]
FIG. 16 shows the winning number counter updating process (steps X308 and X331) in the above-described winning port switch / state monitoring process and fraud & winning monitoring process. In the prize number counter updating process, first, the number of prize hole switches to be monitored is acquired from the prize hole monitoring table (step X351), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize hole switch (to be exact, a change in input). The determination is made (step X352). In addition to the number of times the monitoring is repeated (the number of switches), the winning switch of the winning port monitoring table (illegal monitoring table) prepared in the winning port switch / state monitoring process, a monitoring switch bit for each switch, Information on the lower address of the prize number counter area 1 and the lower address of the prize number counter area 2 is defined.

  When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step X352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X363), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X364). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step X353), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X354). It is determined whether the overflow occurs (step X355). If no overflow has occurred (step X355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step X356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357). ). When an overflow occurs (step X355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357). In the case of the present embodiment, in step X354, the counter for prize balls (transmitting the payout command) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (range 0 to 65535).

  After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X358), and it is determined whether the overflow occurs (step X359). In the case of the present embodiment, in step X358, the counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0 to 255). When an overflow has occurred (step X359; Y), the process proceeds to step X361. When no overflow has occurred (step X359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step X360), and the process proceeds to step X361.

  Next, a target winning notification command is prepared (step X361), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X362). The target winning notification command is a command for notifying the effect control device 300 that there is a winning in each winning opening. By this command, the effect control device 300 is notified that the start winning port 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the first special variation winning device 38, the second special variation winning device 39, and the general winning ports 351 to 354 have been won. The notification can be given, and the effect control device 300 can execute the effect corresponding to the winning based on this command.

  After that, the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X363), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X363). When the monitoring of all the switches is not completed (step X364; N), the process returns to the process (step X352) of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is finished (step X364; Y), the winning number counter updating process is finished. By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information is stored. In addition, the winning information corresponding to the winning opening will be transmitted to the effect control device 300.

  With respect to the general winning opening 351 to 354, different winning notification commands are transmitted for each of the detected winning opening switches 35a to 35c. Thereby, in the effect control device 300, the winning of the general winning opening 351 detected by the winning opening switch 35a, the winning of the general winning opening 352 detected by the winning opening switch 35b, and the winning opening switch 35c are detected. It is possible to distinguish between the general winning openings 353 and 354 which are won, and it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to each. Further, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, since the effect based on the winning in the general winning openings 353 and 354 is not performed, the winning notification command based on the detection by the winning opening switch 35c may not be transmitted.

  That is, the winning openings having the same function (general winning openings 351 to 354 that generate only prize balls) are in one of the two gaming areas 32 (the right gaming area, the second area). Information for distinguishing each winning port is transmitted for a plurality of winning ports, and the winning port cannot be distinguished for a plurality of winning ports in the other game area 32 (the left gaming area, the first area). It can be said that the information is transmitted or the information is not transmitted. In addition, regarding the winning opening having the same function, information based on the winning of the winning opening in one of the two playing areas 32 (the playing area on the right side) and the other playing area 32 (the playing area on the left side). It can be said that the information based on the winning of the winning port in the area) is different information or the information is transmitted only from one game area 32. It suffices that at least one winning hole having the same function is provided in each of the two game areas 32.

  In addition, for winning openings with the same function, information based on winnings at the winning opening in one of the branched downflow paths (downflow path on the right side) and the other downflow path (downflow path on the left side). It can be said that the information based on the winning in the winning opening in (4) is set as different information or the information is transmitted only from one of the flow paths. Further, although it is assumed that there are two game areas 32 or two downflow paths, there may be three or more game areas 32 or downflow paths, and in this case, each game area 32 or downflow path is provided. Different information may be transmitted according to the game area 32 and the flow-down route for the winning openings having the same function. Moreover, you may make it transmit information only about the winning openings provided in the specific game area 32 or the downflow route among the respective game areas 32 or downflow routes.

  Further, although different prize notification commands are transmitted for prize holes having the same function, it can be said that different prize notification commands are transmitted for prize holes having the same game value (number of prize balls etc.) to be given. It can also be said that different winning notification commands are transmitted for winning openings that can be won at the same time. In addition to the general winning holes 351 to 354, the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 can be cited as winning holes having the same function and the same gaming value. However, since the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are not opened at the same time, it is not possible to win at the same time.

  In addition, the winning notification command may not be transmitted for a winning opening that can always transmit that there is a winning to the effect control device 300 by a command different from the winning notification command. However, if the command is not always transmitted when there is a prize, the prize notification command is transmitted. For example, in the case of the ordinary variable winning device 37, when the decoration special figure reservation number command is transmitted in association with the occurrence of the second starting memory based on the winning, the prize is won when the second starting memory reaches the upper limit. Since the second starting memory does not occur, the decoration special figure reservation number command is not transmitted. In the case of such a winning opening, a prize notification command may be always transmitted when there is a prize, or a prize notification command is not transmitted when a decoration special figure hold number command is transmitted, The prize notification command may be transmitted only when the decorative special figure hold number command is not transmitted.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
FIG. 17 shows the starting opening switch monitoring process (step X111) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In the starting opening switch monitoring processing, first, the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) winning award monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and the hard random number acquisition processing (step X492) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not there is the information regarding the winning of the starting opening set when the jackpot random number is acquired based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition processing (step X493).

If the information regarding the existence of the winning opening is not set based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. It should be noted that in this case, the information regarding no winning of the starting opening is set.
On the other hand, when the information regarding the winning of the starting opening is set based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure low probability & no time saving (in the normal gaming state). (Step X494). Then, when the special figure low probability & no time saving is in progress (step X494; Y), the process proceeds to step X497. If the special figure low probability & time saving is not in progress (step X494; N), a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and effect command setting processing (step X496) is performed.

  Based on the reception of the right-handing instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 gives a right-handing instruction notification that instructs the player to make a right-handed stroke by display or voice. When the player is in the specific game state or the special game state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the right hand, and the player does not win unless the player hits the left hand. When a winning is detected, the right-handing instruction is informed.

  Then, a table for setting information on the hold by the starting opening 1 is prepared (step X497), and the special figure starting opening switch common processing (step X498) is performed. Next, the start opening 2 (ordinary variation winning device 37) winning award monitoring table is prepared (step X499), a hard random number acquisition process (step X500) is performed, and a jackpot random number is obtained based on the winning of the ordinary variation winning device 37. It is determined whether or not there is the information regarding the winning of the starting mouth set in this case (step X501).

When the information regarding the winning of the starting opening is not set based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (step X501; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. It should be noted that in this case, the information regarding no winning of the starting opening is set.
On the other hand, when the information with the start mouth winning is set based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (step X501; Y), whether the electric power (normal variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, the normal It is determined whether or not the variable winning device 37 is operated and the gaming ball is in an open state in which a prize can be won (step X502). When the universal electric power is operating (step X502; Y), the process proceeds to step X504. Transition. On the other hand, when the general electric power is not operating (step X502; N), it is determined whether the general electric power is illegal (step X503).

  In the determination as to whether or not the regular electric fraud has occurred, it is determined that the fraud has occurred if the number of illegally awarded prizes for the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normally variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  When the illegal power generation is occurring (step X503; Y), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second starting memory is not generated any more. In addition, when the illegal call is not occurring (step X503; N), a table for setting information on the hold by the starting opening 2 is prepared (step X504), and the special figure starting opening switch common processing (step X505) is performed. Then, the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.

[Common processing for special drawing start switch]
FIG. 18 shows the special figure starting port switch common process (steps X498, X505) in the starting port switch monitoring process described above. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are input.

In this special figure starting port switch common processing, first, information regarding the number of winnings to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is provided to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The output number of the starting port signal, which is the number of times of output, is loaded (step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether the output number overflows (step X523).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output count area of the RWM (step X524), and the special figure hold (starting) corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored (starting) is started. It is determined whether or not the number of stored), that is, the number of special figure suspension (starting storage) to be updated is less than the upper limit (here, 4) (step X525). On the other hand, when the output count overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of output times can be stored up to 255. However, when the upper limit is stored, the value is not saved after updating because it loops to 0 by updating +1.

  If the number of reserved special figure to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step X525; N), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends. On the other hand, when the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step X525; Y), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (special map 1 reserved number or special map 2 reserved number) is updated by +1. (Step X526), the target starting opening winning flag is saved (Step X527). Next, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number is calculated (step X528), and the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition processing is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM. (Step X529).

After that, the big hit symbol random number of the starting mouth switch of the object of monitoring is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Next, the falling lottery random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X532) and saved in the falling lottery random number storage area of the RWM (step X533).
Next, it is determined whether or not the winning is to the starting opening 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step X534), and when the winning is not to the starting opening 2 (step X534; N), the process proceeds to step X537. On the other hand, in the case of winning the start opening 2 (step X534; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X535), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X536). .

Then, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step X537), and the special figure reservation information determination processing (step X538) which is the prefetching processing is performed. Next, a starter switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure reservation number are prepared (step X539), and the effect command setting process (step X540) is performed to perform the special figure starting port switch common process. finish.
That is, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball into the start winning opening 36, and stores the predetermined random number as a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number. It forms the starting memory means. In addition, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37, and the predetermined random number can be stored as a second starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number. 2 Makes a starting memory.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 show the special figure reservation information determination processing (step X538) in the above-mentioned common figure starting port switch common processing. The special figure pending information determination process is a prefetch process that determines the result related information corresponding to the starting memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory.

  In this special figure reservation information determination processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (during the first special game state) (step X541), and if it is a big hit (step X541; Y), the special figure hold information determination. The process ends. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step X541; N), the start opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure starting opening switch common processing is checked, and the winning on the starting opening 1 (start winning opening 36) is won. Is determined (step X542).

  In the case of winning the start opening 1 (step X542; Y), the process proceeds to step X544 and prefetching is performed. On the other hand, if the winning is not in the starting opening 1 (step X542; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure low probability & no time saving (during normal game state) is in progress (step X543). Then, when the special map low probability & no time saving is in progress (step X543; Y), the special map pending information determination processing is ended. That is, in the normal game state, long variation is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game, which has a very long variation time (about 10 minutes), but in this case, prefetching is not performed. On the other hand, when it is not during the special figure low probability & no time saving (step X543; N), it is determined whether the special figure high probability is in progress (step X544).

  When the special figure high probability is not in progress (step X544; N), the process proceeds to step X548. On the other hand, when it is during the special figure high probability (step X544; Y), is the value of the falling lottery random number prepared in step X532 of the common drawing starting port switch common processing within the range of the judgment value of the falling win? The determination is made (step X545). Next, a look-ahead falling lottery information command corresponding to the determination result is prepared (step X546), an effect command setting process (step X547) is performed, and a low probability determination flag is prepared (step X548).

  Then, a pre-reading big hit judging process (step X549) for judging whether or not it is a big hit is carried out by whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit judgment value (big hit low probability judgment value). When the determination result is a big hit (step X550; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting mouth switch is set (step X551), and prepared at step X530 of the special drawing starting mouth switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the hit big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X552), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step X550; N), the starting opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special drawing starting opening switch common processing is checked, and the starting opening 2 (normal variation winning device 37) It is determined whether or not there is a prize (step X553).

  If it is not a winning in the starting opening 2 (step X553; N), the stop symbol information of the outset is set (step X558), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, in the case of winning the start opening 2 (step X553; Y), a small hit determination process (step X554) of determining whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value is a small hit I do. Then, if the determination result is a small hit (step X555; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X556), and the small hit symbol prepared in step X535 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step X557), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, if the determination result is not a small hit (step X555; N), the stop symbol information of the out is set (step X558), the stop symbol information acquired in step X552 or X557, or set in step X558. The stopped symbol information is saved in the symbol information area (step X559).

Then, a read-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step X560), and effect command setting processing (step X561) is performed.
Next, the high-probability determination flag is prepared (step X562), and the pre-reading big-hit determination process (step X563) for determining whether or not the big-hit random number value matches the big-hit judgment value (big-hit high probability judgment value) is a big hit. I do. When the determination result is a big hit (step X564; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting mouth switch is set (step X565), and the special figure starting mouth switch common processing is performed at step X530. The stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number thus prepared is acquired (step X566), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step X564; N), the start opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure starting opening switch common processing is checked, and the starting opening 2 (normal variation winning device 37). It is determined whether or not there is a prize (step X567).

  When it is not a winning in the starting opening 2 (step X567; N), the stop symbol information of the outset is set (step X572), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, in the case of a win to the starting opening 2 (step X567; Y), a small hit determination process (step X568) for determining whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value is a small hit. I do. If the determination result is a small hit (step X569; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X570), and the small hit symbol prepared in step X535 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step X571), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a small hit (step X569; N), the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step X572), and it is determined whether or not there is a special figure high probability (step X573).

  If it is not within the special figure high probability (step X573; N), the process proceeds to step X575. On the other hand, if the special symbol is in high probability (step X573; Y), in the symbol information area in which the stop symbol information is saved in step X559, the stop symbol information acquired in step X566 or X571, or in step X572. The stop symbol information set by the above is overwritten and saved (step X574). The stop symbol information saved in the symbol information area is used for pre-reading of the variation pattern.

Next, a read-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step X575), and effect command setting processing (step X576) is performed. As described above, in this embodiment, every time the special figure hold information determination process is executed, the result determined by the big hit low probability determination value and the result determined by the big hit high probability determination value are transmitted to the effect control device 300. To be done.
Next, a special figure information setting process (step X577) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step X578) I do.
Then, the look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step X579), and the effect command setting process (step X580) is performed to determine the special figure hold information. The process ends. The special figure information setting process in step X577 and the variation pattern setting process in step X578 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

  By the above processing, the prefetch fall lottery information command including the lottery result of the fall lottery for the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target, and the prefetch stop including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target The pattern command and the look-ahead variation pattern command including the variation pattern information in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory are prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, whether or not the result-related information corresponding to the starting memory (whether it falls (whether the big hit probability state shifts from a high probability state to a low probability state (normal probability state)), whether it is a big hit or a small hit, , Variation pattern type) determination result (prefetching result) can be notified to the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory, and is particularly displayed on the display device 41. It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the displayed decoration special figure starting memory display.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that can determine the result and variation mode information of the variable display game before the start of the variable display game, based on the startup memory stored in the startup storage unit. In addition, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start storage means before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, determines whether or not a special result is obtained). Make a preliminary judgment. Note that the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance not only at the time of the winning prize when the starting memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed. Good.

[Pre-reading big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 21 shows the prefetching big hit determination processing (steps X549, X563) in the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination processing. In this pre-reading big hit judgment processing, first, the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (step X581), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582; Y), that is, when it is not the big hit, deviation is set as the judgment result (step X587), and the pre-reading big hit judgment processing is ended. It should be noted that the deviation as the determination result means that the big hit lottery has been missed.
On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582; N), it is judged whether the judgment flag is the high probability judgment flag (step X583). When the determination flag is the high probability determination flag (step X583; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X584), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step X586). On the other hand, if the determination flag is not the high probability determination flag (step X583; N), that is, if it is the low probability determination flag, the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X585). ), It is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step X586; Y), that is, when it is not the big hit, deviation is set as the judgment result (step X587), and the pre-reading big hit judgment processing is ended. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step X586; N), that is, when it is a big hit, the big hit is set as the judgment result (step X588), and the prefetch big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 22 shows the special figure 1 game process (step X112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In the special figure 1 game process, control of the entire process relating to the special figure 1 variable display game and setting of the display of special figure 1 are performed. In the special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 interruption flag which is set when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted is set (step Y99). In the special figure 1 variable display game, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the second special result (small hit) during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the second special game state is executed. , Is interrupted during execution of the second special game state.

  If the special figure 1 interruption flag is not set (step Y99; N), that is, if the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted, the process moves to step Y100, and the subsequent special figure 1 variable display is performed. Performs processing related to the game. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 interruption flag is set (step Y99; Y), that is, if the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the processing relating to the special figure 1 variable display game in steps Y100 to Y115 is performed. No, the process proceeds to step Y116. As a result, during the suspension of the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

  In the processing relating to the special figure 1 variable display game, first, a special game state executed based on whether the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2 is in effect, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or a small hit. It is determined whether it is in progress (step Y100). Then, in the case of the big hit / small hit in the special figure 2 (step Y100; Y), the process proceeds to step Y103. On the other hand, when the big hit / small hit of special figure 2 is not in progress (step Y100; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y101) is performed, and the specific region switch monitoring process (step Y102) is performed.

In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game balls are detected by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Processing for monitoring and setting the special winning opening count command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the winning of the special winning opening, and for closing the special winning opening when a predetermined number of winnings are made to the special winning opening Process. In the special figure 1 game process, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit, and the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. For the special game state that is executed based on a big hit or a small hit, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball is monitored by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variation winning device 38, and is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (stochastic operation area). The process of setting the area passing flag is performed. A process for generating a special game state is performed based on the fact that the specific area passing flag is set.

  Next, if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y103), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). When the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, when the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step Y116. When the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the process branches to the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. In order to do so, first, the special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referenced is prepared in a register (step Y105), the special figure 1 game process number is loaded and prepared (step Y106), and 2-byte data acquisition processing is performed ( Step Y107). Thus, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired from the special figure 1 game sequence branch table, and the subroutine call by the special figure 1 game process number is performed (step Y108).

In step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special effect are monitored. Fig. 1 Special figure 1 normal process (step Y109) for setting information necessary for performing the changing process is performed.
In step Y108, if the special figure 1 game process number is "1", the special display for setting the stop display time of special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 1 display 1 The changing process (step Y110) is performed.
In step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, setting of a fanfare command according to the kind of big hit, and each big hit type The special figure 1 display processing (step Y111) is performed to set the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern and the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing.

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, update of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the special winning opening, etc. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y112).
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game process number is "4", the interval command is set if the big hit round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if the big hit round is the final round, or the special winning opening The special winning opening opening process (step Y113) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game process number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening, and the special figure 1 The special winning opening remaining ball process (step Y114) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit ending process is performed.
If the special figure 1 game process number is "6" in step Y108, the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y115) that sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process (step Y109) I do.

  After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is prepared (step Y116), the symbol fluctuation control processing (step Y117) concerning the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed, and the lever solenoid The lever solenoid control process (step Y118) for controlling the operation of 38f is performed, and the special figure 1 game process is ended. The special figure 1 game process is a process of performing a series of execution controls regarding the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special Figure 2 game processing]
23 and 24 show the special figure 2 game process (step X113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In the special figure 2 game process, the control of the entire process relating to the special figure 2 variable display game and the setting of the special figure 2 display are performed. The special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the special figure 1 game process described above for the special figure 2.

  In the special figure 2 game processing, first, it is determined whether the big hit of the special figure 1 is in progress, that is, whether the special game state is executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit (step). Y130). Then, in the case of the big hit of special figure 1 (step Y130; Y), the process proceeds to step Y133. When the big hit in special figure 1 is not in progress (step Y130; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y131) is performed, and the specific region switch monitoring process (step Y132) is performed.

In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game balls are detected by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Processing for monitoring and setting the special winning opening count command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the winning of the special winning opening, and for closing the special winning opening when a predetermined number of winnings are made to the special winning opening Process. In the special figure 2 game process, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball is monitored by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variation winning device 38, and is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (stochastic operation area). The process of setting the area passing flag is performed. A process for generating a special game state is performed based on the fact that the specific area passing flag is set.

  Next, if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y133), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). When the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y153. When the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0. It is determined (step Y135).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y136), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area is extended. The fluctuation timer value (for example, 60000 msec) is saved (step Y137), and the process proceeds to step Y153.
In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variable display game with a high probability of small hits in the normal game state, the change time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state is a very long time. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at once even if the upper limit value is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the variable time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of times of repetition, which is the number of times of measuring the specified time (for example, 60000 msec).

  When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number, first, the reference figure 2 game sequence branch table is referred to. Is prepared in the register (step Y138), the special figure 2 game processing number is loaded and prepared (step Y139), and 2-byte data acquisition processing is performed (step Y140). Thereby, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is obtained using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table, and the subroutine call by the special figure 2 game process number is performed (step Y141).

In step Y141, if the special figure 2 game process number is “0”, the change start of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the change start setting and the effect setting of the special figure 2 variable display game and the special effect are monitored. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 normal processing (step Y142) for setting the information necessary for performing the changing process is performed.
In step Y141, if the special figure 2 game process number is "1", the special display for setting the stop display time of special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 displaying process 2 The changing process (step Y143) is performed.
At step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, setting of fanfare commands according to the kind of big hit, and of each big hit type The special figure 2 displaying process (step Y144) for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern and the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing is performed.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game process number is "3", setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y145).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game process number is "4", the interval command is set if the jackpot round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if it is the final round, and the special winning opening The special winning opening opening process (step Y146) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

In step Y141, if the special figure 2 game process number is "5", the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening if the big hit round is the final round, and the special figure 2 The special winning opening remaining ball process (step Y147) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit ending process is performed.
If the special figure 2 game process number is "6" in step Y141, the special figure 2 jackpot end process (step Y148) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal process (step Y108) I do.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command setting, and the processing during the small hit are performed. The small hit fanfare middle processing (step Y149) for setting information necessary for the above is performed.
When the special figure 2 game process number is "8" in step Y141, a small hit mid-range process (step Y150) for setting an ending command and information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process, etc. is executed. To do.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game process number is "9", a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls winning in the special winning opening during the process of small hit, and the end of small hit The small hit remaining ball process (step Y151) for setting the information necessary for the process is performed.
When the special figure 2 game process number is "10" in step Y141, the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y152) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal process is performed.

  After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y153), and the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y154) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed, and the lever solenoid The lever solenoid control process (step Y155) for controlling the operation of 38f is performed, and the special figure 2 game process is ended. This special figure 2 game process is a process of performing a series of execution controls regarding the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above-described special figure 2 game process is basically the same as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process for the special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. The corresponding processing will be described in parallel.

[Special Figure 1 Normal processing]
FIG. 25 shows the special figure 1 normal process (step Y109) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 normal process, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start changing (step Y201). The state in which it is possible to start variation in the special figure 1 in this determination is not from the stop of variation in the special figure 2 variation display game in which the big hit or the small hit occurs until the end of the special game state. It should be noted that the variation cannot be started even during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game, but in that case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. However, it is not necessary to determine this here.

When the special figure 1 cannot start changing (step Y201; N), "0" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y216), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area. (Step Y217), the special process 1 normal process is ended. Further, when the special map 1 can start changing (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handing instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handing instruction notification flag is set (step Y202).
If the left-handing instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-handing instruction notification has not been made (step Y202; N), a left-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), effect command setting processing (step Y204) is performed, and a left-handing instruction notification flag is set. Yes (step Y205). The left-handing instruction notification flag is set to be cleared when the specific game state ends, whereby the left-handing instruction notification is given when the game state shifts to the normal game state.

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y206). If the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step Y206; N), the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and the effect command setting process (step Y208) is performed. . After that, special figure 1 variation start processing (step Y209) for setting information regarding the special figure 1 variation display game is performed, and a decorative special figure 1 pending number command corresponding to the special figure 1 pending number is prepared (step Y210). ) And effect command setting processing (step Y211). At the time of performing the process (step Y210) of preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command, the special figure 1 reservation number is not decremented based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 reservation is held. The reserved number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number subtracted from the number is prepared. After that, the remaining game number command corresponding to the time shortening variation number is prepared (step Y212), and the effect command setting process (step Y213) is performed.

  Next, the change of special figure 1 is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y214). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variable display game, and any one of 0 to 5 is set. Special map status 0 indicates that neither the special map 1 variable display game nor the special map 2 variable display game is running, and the special map status 1 indicates that only the special map 1 variable display game is running. The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. In addition, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 is the first special game state which is the special game state based on the big hit. There is, and the special figure status 5 indicates that it is the second special game state which is the special game state based on the small hit. Since the special figure 1 variable display game is started here, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status. After that, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting processing (step Y215) is performed, and the special figure 1 normal processing ends.

[Special figure 2 daily processing]
FIG. 26 shows the special figure 2 normal process (step Y142) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 normal process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start changing (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 can start changing in this determination is not from the stop of the change in the special figure 1 changing display game which is a big hit until the end of the special game state. It is to be noted that the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, but in that case, the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. However, it is not necessary to determine this here.

  If the special figure 2 cannot start changing (step Y221; N), "0" is set as the special figure 2 game process number (step Y238), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area. (Step Y239), special figure 2 usual processing ends. In addition, when the special figure 2 can start changing (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether the number of special figure 2 reservations is 0 (step Y222).

  Then, when the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (step Y222; N), the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and the effect command setting process (step Y224) is performed. .. After that, the special figure 2 variation start processing (step Y225) for setting information about the special figure 2 variable display game and the like is performed, and a decorative special figure 2 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step Y226. ) And effect command setting processing (step Y227). At the time of performing the process (step Y226) of preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command, the special figure 2 reservation number is not decremented based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the current special figure 2 reservation is held. The reserved number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved number subtracted from the number is prepared. After that, a remaining game number command corresponding to the number of times of shortening time is prepared (step Y228), and effect command setting processing (step Y229) is performed.

  Next, the change of special figure 2 is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y230). Since the special figure 2 variable display game is started here, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status. After that, special figure 2 mid-fluctuation process shift setting processing (step Y231) is performed, and the special figure 2 normal processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y232). Then, when the number of reserved special maps 1 is 0 (step Y232; Y), it is determined whether or not the special maps 1 are changing (step Y233). If the special map 1 is not changing (step Y233; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y234). If it is not started (step Y234; N), the customer waiting demo is started. Performs processing related to status setting. In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step Y232; N), when the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step Y233; Y), or when the customer waiting demonstration has started (step Y234; Y). Shifts to step Y238.

  In the process for setting the customer waiting state, first, the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step Y235), and the customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y236), and the effect is produced. Command setting processing (step Y237) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y238. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it becomes possible to display different customer waiting screens depending on the probability state.

  Further, when the production control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the production control device 300 without the backup function loses the information on the game state, so that it becomes impossible to perform an appropriate production. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and the probability information command based on the change of the game state is transmitted. It will be possible to return to the production according to the game state faster than waiting.

  Further, with the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously, and it is possible that the probability state changes due to the processing for the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, the variation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure variation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). As a result, it becomes possible for the effect control device 300 to perform an appropriate effect according to the game state.

  In addition, by transmitting the variation start probability information command each time the special figure variation display game is started, even if the production control device 300 is restarted, the production according to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. Therefore, it is possible to return to the effect according to the game state earlier than waiting for the probability information command based on the change of the game state to be transmitted. It should be noted that the customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for enabling the production control device 300 to return to the production according to the game state when it is restarted.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
In FIG. 27A, the special figure 1 variation start process (step Y209) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 normal process is shown. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. In the special figure 1 variation start processing, first, the special figure 1 information setting flag used for distribution of variation patterns in the special figure pending information determination processing is set (step Y241). Next, a random number is loaded from the special figure 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) to prepare (step Y242), and the special drawing 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0. (Step Y243), a falling lottery process (step Y244) is performed to draw a transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage with the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest in special figure 1).

  Next, the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y245) for setting the deviation information or the big hit information as the result information of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed, and the special figure 1 stop related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) is stopped. A symbol setting process (step Y246) is performed. Then, the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y247) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed to refer to various information relating to the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game. The special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which the information of (1) is set, is prepared (step Y248).

  After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y249) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variable display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 variable display game. The processing (step Y250) is performed, and the time shortening variation number update processing (step Y251) is performed. Next, as the process number, "1" relating to the process during fluctuation of special figure 1 is set (step Y252), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step Y253).

  Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y254), and a signal related to fluctuation start of special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y255). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y256), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is set in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area ( Here, 100 msec) is saved (step Y257), the initial value (here, "0" indicating a blank symbol) in the special figure 1 changing symbol number area is saved (step Y258), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. To finish.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 27B shows the special figure 2 variation start process (step Y225) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 normal process. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game. In the special figure 2 variation start processing, first, the special figure 2 information setting flag used for sorting the variation patterns in the special figure pending information determination processing is set (step Y261). Next, a random number is loaded from the special figure 2 falling lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) to prepare (step Y262), and the special drawing 2 falling lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0. (Step Y263), a falling lottery process (step Y264) is performed to draw a transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure starting storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2).

  Next, as the result information of the special figure 2 variable display game, the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y265) for setting the deviation information, the big hit information or the small hit information is performed, and the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) is set. Special figure 2 stop design setting processing (step Y266) is performed. To perform special figure 2 information setting processing (step Y267) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern, and refer to various information relating to the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game. The special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table which is a table in which the information of (1) is set is prepared (step Y268).

  After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y269) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a variation mode in the special figure 2 variable display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 variable display game The process (step Y270) is performed, and the time reduction fluctuation start update process (step Y271) is performed. Next, as the process number, "1" relating to the process during fluctuation of special figure 2 is set (step Y272), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step Y273).

  Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y274), and a signal related to fluctuation start of special figure 2 (for example, a special symbol 2 fluctuation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y275). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area (step Y276), and the initial value of the blink control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is set in the special figure 2 blink control timer area ( Here, 100 msec) is saved (step Y277), the initial value (here, "0" indicating a blank symbol) in the special figure 2 changing symbol number area is saved (step Y278), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. To finish.

  In addition, when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game in the above-described special figure 1 variation start processing or special figure 2 variation start processing, information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests or informs the probability setting value, such as selecting a variation pattern according to the probability setting value or changing the selection probability of the variation pattern according to the probability setting value.

[Falling lottery processing]
FIG. 28 shows the falling lottery processing (steps Y244 and Y264) performed in the special figure 1 variation start processing and the special figure 2 variation start processing. In the falling lottery process, first, it is determined whether the special figure high probability is in progress (step Y581), and if it is not in the special figure high probability (step Y581; N), the falling lottery process is ended. In addition, when the special figure high probability is in progress (step Y581; Y), it is determined whether the value of the target falling lottery random number is less than the falling lottery lower limit judgment value (step Y582). Winning the falling lottery means that the falling lottery random number matches the falling lottery determination value. The falling lottery judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the falling lottery random number is equal to or larger than the lower limit value of the falling lottery judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the falling lottery judgment value, and the upper limit value of the falling lottery judgment value. When it is less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, it is judged that the player has won the falling lottery.

When the value of the falling lottery random number is less than the falling lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582; Y), that is, when the falling lottery is not won, the falling lottery process is ended. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the falling lottery random number is not less than the falling lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582; N), it is determined whether the value of the target falling lottery random number is larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (step Y583).
When the value of the falling lottery random number is larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (step Y583; Y), that is, when the falling lottery is not won, the falling lottery process is ended. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the falling lottery random number is not larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (step X583; N), that is, when the falling lottery is won, processing for shifting to a low probability state is performed.

In the process for shifting to the low probability state, first, a signal related to the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, the jackpot 2 signals are set to ON and the jackpot 4 signals are set to OFF. Next, the signal regarding the end of high probability and shortening of time is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is set to OFF.
Then, the signal relating to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y586), and the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step Y587). After that, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y588), and the falling lottery process is ended. As a result, the low-probability state and the normal electric power support state are entered, and the normal game state is entered. Information about the end of the high probability state and the end of the universal communication support is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs a process such as changing the effect mode based on this information.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 29A shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y245) in the above-mentioned Toku-zu 1 variation start process. In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y281). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step Y282), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 ( Step Y283).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 which is the result of the big hit judgment of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a big hit (step Y284), and when it is a big hit (step Y284; Y), the big hit flag 1 is set. The process ends. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are prevented from being a big hit. If the jackpot is not a jackpot (step Y284; N), a jackpot determination process (step Y285) is performed to determine whether or not the obtained jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

  If the result of the jackpot determination process (step Y285) is a jackpot (step Y286; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area in which the deviation information is saved in step Y281 (step Y286). Y287), and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y285) is not a big hit (step Y286; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. In this case, the hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 29B shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y265) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step Y293), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 ( Step Y294).

After that, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 which is the result of the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a big hit (step Y295), and if it is a big hit (step Y295; Y), the process proceeds to step Y299. To do. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game which are executed at the same time are prevented from being a big hit. If the jackpot is not a jackpot (step Y295; N), a jackpot determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether or not the obtained jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.
When the result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area in which the deviation information was saved in step Y292 (step Y297). Y298) and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

On the other hand, if the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is not a jackpot (step Y297; N), it is determined whether or not the obtained jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value, which is a jackpot. A small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.
If the result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 2 area in which the deviation information is saved in step Y291. Save (step Y301), and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not the small hit (step Y300; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process ends. In this case, the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit determination processing]
FIG. 30 shows the big hit determination processing (steps Y285 and Y296) in the big hit flag 1 setting processing and the big hit flag 2 setting processing described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

  When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; Y), that is, when it is not the big hit, deviation is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. It should be noted that the deviation as the determination result means that the big hit lottery has been missed. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; N), it is determined whether the special figure high probability is in progress (step Y313).

  When the special figure high probability is in progress (step Y313; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y314), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step Y316). If the special figure high probability is not in progress (step Y313; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y315), and the value of the target jackpot random number is determined as the upper limit. It is determined whether the value is larger than the value (step Y316).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; Y), that is, when it is not the big hit, deviation is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; N), that is, when it is a big hit, the big hit is set as the judgment result (step Y318), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 31 shows the small hit determination process (step Y299) in the above-described large hit flag 2 setting process. In this small hit determination processing, first, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). The small hit means that the big hit random number (the same random number as the big hit determination) matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and is equal to or lower than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Further, the big hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value do not overlap.

  If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; Y), that is, if it is not the small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y323), and the small hit determination process ends. It should be noted that the deviation as the determination result means that the small hit lottery has been missed. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; N), it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y322).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y322; Y), that is, when it is not the small hit, a deviation is set as the judgment result (step Y323), and the small hit judgment processing is ended. When the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y322; N), that is, when it is the small hit, the small hit is set as the judgment result (step Y324), and the small hit judgment process is executed. finish.

[Special map 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 32 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y246) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1 Jackpot random number is loaded from (for) (step Y332). Next, the special figure 1 big hit design table is set (step Y333), the stop design number which corresponds to the big hit design random number which is loaded is acquired, and it saves in the special figure 1 stop design save area (step Y334). By this processing, the jackpot type is selected. In addition, when the special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly changed.

  After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop design information table is set (step Y335), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special design 1 stop design pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol indicator (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y337), the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the special figure 1 round number is acquired. Save in the upper limit value information area (step Y338), obtain the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, save in the special figure 1 special winning opening opening information area (step Y339), and move to step Y340. .. These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), the stop symbol number at the time of falling off is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y344), and the off stop symbol pattern is set in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area. Save (step Y345). Then, the decoration special drawing 1 command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared and saved in the decoration special drawing 1 command area (step Y340). Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. After that, effect command setting processing (step Y341) is performed. Thereby, the decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y342), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y343), and the special symbol 1 Stop the symbol setting process.

[Special map 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 33 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y266) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process. The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process for the special figure 2. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361), and if it is a big hit (step Y361; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1 Jackpot random number is loaded from (for use)) (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step Y363), the stop design number which corresponds to the big hit design random number which is loaded is acquired, and it saves in the special figure 2 stop design save area (step Y364). By this processing, the jackpot type is selected. In addition, when the special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved not in the special figure 2 stop symbol area but in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly changed.

  After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table is set (step Y365), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special design 2 stop design pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, the special symbol 2 display device 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y367), the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the special figure 2 round number is acquired. Save in the upper limit value information area (step Y368), obtain the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, save it in the special figure 2 special winning opening opening information area (step Y369), and move to step Y370. .. These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y375), and if it is a small hit (step Y375; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number A small hitting symbol random number is loaded from the storage area (for holding number 1) (step Y376). Next, the special figure 2 small hit design table is set (step Y377), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded small hit design random number is acquired and saved in the special design 2 stop design save area (step Y378). By this processing, the small hit type is selected. Then, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y379), and the process proceeds to step Y370.

  Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y375; N), the stop symbol number at the time of falling off is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y380), and the off stop symbol pattern is specially drawn. 2 Save in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y381). Next, a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared and saved in the decoration special figure 2 command area (step Y370). Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. After that, effect command setting processing (step Y371) is performed. Thereby, the decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y372), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y373), and the special figure 2 The small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y374), and the special figure 2 stopped symbol setting process is ended.

  By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100, based on the first start-up memory stored in the first start-up storage means, the result and the change mode information of the first change display game (special figure 1 change display game), Forms a first determining means that can be determined before the start of. In addition, the game control device 100, based on the second start memory stored in the second start storage means, the result and the change mode information of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game), based on the second variable display game. It constitutes a second determining means that can be determined before the start of. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a fluctuation pattern determination means capable of determining the fluctuation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variable display game, based on the determination information stored in the starting memory.

  From the above, the starting winning opening 36 is arranged at a position where the game ball shot to one side of the game area 32 can be won, and the normal variation winning device 37 is a game ball shot to the other side of the game area 32. Is arranged at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variable display game includes information relating to the variation time with which the execution time of the variable display game can be specified, and the second determination is made in the normal state (normal game state). The variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the second variation display game by the means is longer than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination means. Become.

  Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Set the detailed effect contents in the decoration display variable display game. The information about the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information about the number of starting memories (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information about a stop pattern, and variation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include variable commands that include information about patterns. In addition, by transmitting the decorative special drawing command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a first variable display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game process.
Further, the game control device 100 constitutes second variable display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game process.

  Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and variation mode information of the first variable display game determined by the first determining means, and the result and variation mode information of the second variable display game determined by the second determining means. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the production control means (production control device 300). Further, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time in response to the start of the variation display game for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game, and when the measurement time has passed the variation time, It constitutes a measurement means for ending the measurement of the variation time of the variation display game.

  In the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state, a long variation is set with a very long variation time, but in this case, information about the variation time is not transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the long variation is set. It is also possible to send a command indicating only that. In the case of long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply display the fluctuation, and it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the variable display based on the reception of the command of the long fluctuation. The variation time is managed only by the game control device 100, a stop command is transmitted to the production control device 300 when the variation time ends, and the production control device 300 stops the variation display based on the reception of the stop command. To do so. By doing so, the control load on the effect control device 300 can be reduced.

[Special map 1 information setting process]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y247) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process. In the special figure 1 information setting process, first, the fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (step Y401), the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern are acquired (step Y402), and the special pattern Figure 1 jackpot, that is, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a stop symbol pattern of jackpot (step Y403). If the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y403; Y), the process proceeds to step Y405.

  If the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y403; N), the special figure 1 holding number is added to the first half offset data to convert the value (step Y404). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y405). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. This variation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating the first half variation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used later for selecting a variation group.

After that, the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y405), and the special figure 1 information setting process ends. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The variation allocation information 2 is a table pointer for allocating the latter half variation (reach type (including no reach)) and is used later for selecting a variation group.
As described above, in the special figure 1 variable display game, in the case of the deviation, only the first half variation pattern is determined in consideration of the special figure 1 holding number, and in the case of a big hit, the special figure 1 holding number is considered. Instead, the fluctuation pattern is determined.

[Special map 2 information setting process]
FIG. 35 shows the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y267) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process. In the special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time saving (in the normal gaming state) (step Y421). When it is not during the special figure low probability & no time saving (step Y421; N), it is determined whether or not it is a time shortening final variation (step Y427). Here, when the special figure 2 variation display game to be started from now is the special figure variation display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time reduction final variation.

  Then, when it is the final reduction in time reduction (step Y427; Y), the process proceeds to step Y428. If it is not the time reduction final variation (step Y427; N), the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y423), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern are acquired. (Step Y424) and the process proceeds to step Y425.

On the other hand, when the special figure low probability & no time saving is in progress (step Y421; Y), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is present (step Y427). Here, when the falling lottery for the special figure 2 variable display game to be started is won, it is determined that the high probability final fluctuation.
If it is a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y427; Y), the first-half offset data and the second-half offset data for the final fluctuation are set (step Y428), and the process proceeds to step Y425.
If it is not the high-probability final change (step Y427; N), it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 2 big hit (step Y429). If it is not the special figure 2 big hit (step Y429; N), the first half offset data for low probability special figure 2 deviation / small hit is set (step Y430), and the latter half offset data for special figure 2 long fluctuation is set. Is set (step Y432), and the process proceeds to step Y425.

  When the special figure 2 big hit (step Y429; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y431), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 long fluctuation is set. Yes (step Y432). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y425). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. This variation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating the first half variation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used later for selecting a variation group.

After that, the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y426), and the special figure 2 information setting process ends. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The variation allocation information 2 is a table pointer for allocating the latter half variation (reach type (including no reach)) and is used later for selecting a variation group.
As described above, in the special figure 2 variable display game, the variation pattern is determined without considering the special figure 2 pending number.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 36 shows the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y249) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process. The variation patterns are the first half variation pattern which is the variation mode from the start of the special figure variation display game to the reach state and the second half variation which is the variation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure variation display game. The first half variation pattern is set after the latter half variation pattern is set first.

In this special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group address table is set (step Y451), and the addresses of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 are acquired and prepared (step Y452). The variable pattern random number 1 is loaded from the variable pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of holding 1) of FIG. 1 and prepared (step Y453).
Next, it deviates from the special figure 1, that is, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is the disengaged stop symbol pattern (step Y454). )I do. If the special map 1 is not out of alignment (step Y454; N), a distribution process (step Y456) is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the structure of the second-half variation group table is different between the hitting and the non-hit. Specifically, the hit type has a 1-byte size, and the loss type has a 2-byte size. Since the hit occurrence rate is lower than the outfall occurrence rate and one byte is sufficient, the hit size is 1 byte in size from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity. Therefore, at the time of winning, only the lower value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 of 2 bytes is used. Further, the occurrence rate of deviation is higher than the occurrence rate of hit, and in order to enable more various effects, the size for deviation is 2 bytes in size.

  Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of special figure 1. To prepare (step Y458). Then, a distribution process (step Y459) is performed, and the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step Y460). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y461), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y462). Then, the address of the first-half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y463), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of holding 1) of special figure 1. Prepare (step Y464).
After that, the distribution process (step Y465) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y466), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is ended. By this process, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is set.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y269) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group address table is set (step Y471), the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y472), The variable pattern random number 1 is loaded from the variable pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of holding 1) of FIG. 2 and prepared (step Y473).

  Next, the special figure 2 is deviated, that is, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is the disengaged stop symbol pattern (step Y474), and when the special figure 2 is deviated (step Y474; Y), a 2-byte allocation process (step Y475). )I do. If the special map 2 is not out of alignment (step Y474; N), a distribution process (step Y476) is performed.

  Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for reserved number 1) of special figure 2. And prepare (step Y478). Then, a distribution process (step Y479) is performed, and the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step Y480). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

Next, the first half variation group table is set (step Y481), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half variation number determined as the variation distribution information 1 (step Y482). Then, the address of the first-half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y483), and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of holding 1) of special figure 2. Prepare (step Y484).
After that, the distribution process (step Y485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y486), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process ends. By this process, the first-half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 2 variable display game to be started is set.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 38 shows the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps Y250 and Y270) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. In this fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y551). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y552), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y553). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y554), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y555). Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step Y556), and the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y557).

  In addition, in the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state, a long variation is set with a very long variation time. In this case, as the additional value, the remaining time (time less than 60,000 msec) excluding the time that can be measured using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times of measuring the specified time (here, 60,000 msec), is the additional value. Is calculated as

  After that, it is determined whether the information of special figure 1 is being set (step Y558). If the information of special figure 1 is being set (step Y558; Y), the process proceeds to step Y562. If the information of special figure 1 is not being set (step Y558; N), that is, if the information of special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether or not the long fluctuation of special figure 2 has started (step Y559). The long variation is a variation pattern set when the special display 2 variation display game is in the normal game state, and is determined by the number of the set variation pattern.

  Then, when the long fluctuation of special figure 2 is not started (step Y559; N), 0 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y560). Further, when the long fluctuation of special figure 2 is started (step Y559; Y), 9 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y561).

  After that, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step Y562), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step Y563), and the effect command setting process (step Y564) is performed. To do. Next, the target number of reservations is updated by -1 (step Y566), the content of the target random number storage area is shifted (step Y566), and the empty area after the shift is cleared (step Y567) to set the fluctuation start information. The process ends.

  In the present embodiment, the number of repetitions is set in the long fluctuation of FIG. 2 in order to change the time that is not sufficient with the 2-byte timer. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the timer of 60000 msec and the number of repetitions of 9 are saved as the addition result, the timer is subtracted by the timer interrupt process, and when the time is up, the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1 Set the seconds. As a result, the variation time of the long variation in Toku-zu 2 becomes 10 minutes (= 60000 msec × 10). Since the timer interrupt cycle is 4 ms, it can be set up to about 262 seconds with 2 bytes, but for ease of understanding, it is represented by multiplication of 60 seconds.

[Time reduction change count update process]
FIG. 39 shows the time-reduced variation count update processing (steps Y251 and Y271) in the above-described special figure 1 variation start processing and special figure 2 variation start processing. In this time shortening variation count updating process, first, it is determined whether the special figure high probability is in progress (high probability state) (step Y571). If the special figure high probability is in progress (step Y571; Y), the time is changed. The shortened variation count updating process ends. If it is not in the special figure high probability (step Y571; N), it is determined whether the special figure is being shortened (step Y572). If the special figure is not shortening (step Y572; N), the time shortening variation count updating process ends. When the special drawing time saving is in progress (step Y572; Y), the number of times of time shortening fluctuation is updated by -1 (step Y573), and it is determined whether the number of times of time shortening fluctuation becomes "0" (step Y574). .

When the number of times of time shortening fluctuation is not “0” (step Y574; N), the processing of updating the number of times of time shortening fluctuation is ended. When the number of time shortening fluctuations becomes “0” (step Y574; Y), a signal relating to the end of time saving (for example, the big jack 2 signal is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y575). , A signal related to the end of the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, the ordinary symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, the normal electric auditors 1 open extension The state signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y576).
Next, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y577), the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y578), and the general figure game mode flag area Save the universal time saving flag (step Y579). Then, since the game is returned to the normal game state, the normal base state information is saved in the normal base state determination flag area (step Y580), and the time shortening variation number updating process is ended.

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 40 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y110) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times of symbol determination output is updated by +1 (step Y621). Then, a command is loaded from the decoration special command 1 command area to prepare (step Y622), and effect command setting processing (step Y623) is performed.

  Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and effect command setting processing (step Y625) is performed. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there is a case where it is forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of fluctuation, so when stopping the fluctuation, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. .. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y626). In the present embodiment, for example, the display time is set to 600 msec in the case of a failure and 2000 msec in the case of a big hit.

  Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of alignment (step Y627). If the special map 1 is out of alignment (step Y627; Y), the process proceeds to step Y642. If the special figure 1 is not out of alignment (step Y627; N), that is, if it is a big hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y628). Whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  When the special figure 2 variable display game is not being executed (step Y628; Y), the process proceeds to step Y639. If the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y628; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 displaying process is in progress (step Y629). In other words, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit, and the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result. In addition, even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already completed variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

  When the processing is in process of displaying the special figure 2 (step Y639; Y), the process proceeds to step Y631. Further, when the special figure 2 is not being displayed (step Y629; N), the number of times the symbol determination number is output is updated by +1 (step Y630), and the special figure 1 set above as the display time of the special figure 2 is displayed. Display time + display time of 4 msec is set (step Y631). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 2, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 end at the same time. Even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already in display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started. By this resetting, the stop display time is extended, but it may be shortened in some cases.

  Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y632), and the decorative special figure 2 deviation design command is set and prepared (step Y633). Then, the design command is saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y634), and effect command setting processing (step Y635) is performed. After that, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y636), effect command setting processing (step Y638) is performed, and special figure 2 display processing shift setting processing 2 (step Y638) is performed.

  Then, the command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y639), and the information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area and saved in the round number upper limit value information area. (Step Y640), information is loaded from the special prize 1 special winning opening opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (step Y641). After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y642), and the special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 1 (step Y643) is performed, and the special figure 1 The displayed process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 41 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y143) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol determination frequency is output is updated by +1 (step Y651). Then, commands are loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area to prepare (step Y652), and effect command setting processing (step Y653) is performed.

  Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and effect command setting processing (step Y655) is performed. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y656). In the present embodiment, for example, the display time is set to 600 msec in the case of off, 600 msec in the case of big hit, and 136 msec in the case of small hit.

  After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of alignment (step Y657). If the special map 2 is out of alignment (step Y657; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. If the special figure 2 is not shifted (step Y657; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y658). Whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  If the special figure 1 variable display game is not being executed (step Y658; N), the process proceeds to step Y673. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y658; Y), it is determined whether it is a special figure 2 big hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (step Y659). ). If the special figure 2 big hit is not (step Y659; N), that is, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (step Y670), and the decoration special figure 1 interruption A command is prepared (step Y671), effect command setting processing (step Y672) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y673.

  That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. It is to be noted that the variation display game of the special figure 1 variation display game has already ended, but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The suspended special figure 1 variable display game is restarted at the end of the special game state (second special game state) based on the small hit (second special result).

  On the other hand, if the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y659; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y660). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is forcibly stopped due to the result of the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game. It should be noted that the special display 1 variable display game is also subject to forced stop even if the variable display game has already finished variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended.

  When the processing is in process of displaying the special figure 1 (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y662. In addition, when the special figure 1 is not being displayed (step Y660; N), the number of times the symbol determination number is output is updated by +1 (step Y661), and the special figure 2 of the special figure 2 set as the display time is displayed. The display time + display time of 4 msec is set (step Y662). By setting the display time of the special figure 2 + the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 1, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 end at the same time. Even if the special figure 1 variable display game is already in display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started. By this resetting, the stop display time is extended, but it may be shortened in some cases.

  Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y663), and the decorative special figure 1 deviation design command is set and prepared (step Y664). Then, the design command is saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and effect command setting processing (step Y666) is performed. After that, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), effect command setting processing (step Y668) is performed, and special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 (step Y669) is performed.

  Then, a command is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y673), and whether it is a special figure 2 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. The determination is made (step Y674). If it is a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. If it is not the special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y675), information is loaded from the special prize 2 special winning opening opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (step Y676). After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y677), and the special figure 2 display processing transition setting process 1 (step Y678) is performed, and the special figure 2 The displayed process is terminated.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
FIG. 42 shows the special figure 1 displaying process (step Y111) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 displaying process, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step Y751) to clear the big hit flag 1 area. (Step Y752). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is big hit information (step Y753). If the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y753; Y), the special figure 1 variable display game is displayed. The test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 1 signal is ON) regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y754).

Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop design pattern is loaded from the hit design command area to be prepared (step Y755), and effect command setting processing (step Y756) is performed. After that, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y757), and effect command setting processing (step Y758) is performed.
Next, the special winning opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y759). In the case of the present embodiment, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as the signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the probability state. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability.

  After that, a jackpot fanfare time (for example, 100 msec) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step Y760), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y761). Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y762), and the game number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y763). Further, fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing (step Y764) is performed, and the processing during the display of special figure 1 is terminated.

  On the other hand, when Toku-zu 1 is not a big hit (step Y753; N), that is, when the big hit flag 1 is the outlier information, it is determined whether it is a high-probability final change (step Y765). In step Y765; N), it is determined whether or not it is the time variation final variation (step Y766). Here, when the falling lottery for the running special figure 1 variation display game is won, it is determined to be a high-probability final variation. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is the special figure variable display game which is the 100th time (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time-reduction final variation.

  Then, when it is not the high-probability final variation (step Y765; N) and when it is not the time shortening final variation (step Y766; N), the process proceeds to step Y774. If it is a high-probability final change (step Y765; Y) or if it is a time-shortening final change (step Y766; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y767), and a production command A setting process (step Y768) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y769), the leftward instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y770), and whether or not the small hit of special figure 2 is in progress, that is, It is determined whether or not it is in a special game state executed based on the result of the special display 2 variable display game being a small hit (step Y771).

  When the small hit in special figure 2 is in progress (step Y771; Y), the process proceeds to step Y774. On the other hand, when the small hit in special figure 2 is not in progress (step Y771; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y772). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y773). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handed play is displayed. After that, the change in information of special map 1 in the special map status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y774), and the normal process number of special map 1 is saved in the special process 1 game process number area (step Y775). The displayed process is terminated.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
43 and 44 show the special figure 2 displaying process (step Y144) in the special figure 2 game process described above. The special figure 2 displaying process is the same process as the special figure 1 displaying process described above for the special figure 2. In the special figure 2 displaying process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is set. The two areas are cleared (step Y812).

  Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the special figure 2 variation start processing is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is big hit information (step Y815). If the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y815; Y), the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. The test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 2 is ON signal) related to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop design pattern is loaded from the hit design command area and prepared (step Y817), and effect command setting processing (step Y818) is performed. After that, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y819), and effect command setting processing (step Y820) is performed.
Next, the special winning opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of being a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y821). In the case of the present embodiment, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as the signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the probability state. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability.

  After that, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 100 msec) corresponding to the big winning opening information is set (step Y822), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y823). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y824), and the game number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y825). Further, fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing (step Y826) is performed, and the processing for displaying special figure 2 ends.

  On the other hand, if Toku-zu 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, if the big hit flag 2 is off information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information) (step Y827). .. Then, when the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y827; Y), it is determined whether or not it is a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y828), and when it is not a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y828; N), it is time. It is determined whether it is a shortened final variation (step Y829). Here, when the falling lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined that the high-probability final variation. In addition, when the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time reduction final variation.

Then, when it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y828; N) and when it is not the time shortening final fluctuation (step Y829; N), the process proceeds to step Y834. If it is a high-probability final change (step Y828; Y) or if it is a time-shortening final change (step Y829; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y830), and a production command A setting process (step Y831) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y832), and the left-handing instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y833).
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the player is not made aware of the occurrence of the small hit. In order to do so, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

Next, a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area to prepare (step Y834), and effect command setting processing (step Y835) is performed. Furthermore, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y836), effect command setting processing (step Y837) is performed, and a signal relating to a right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y838). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned on. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y839). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned on, and the display for instructing the right-handed is given.
After that, the lower special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y840), the fraud monitoring outside flag is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y841), and the special figure 2 small hit fanfare processing The shift setting process (step Y857) is performed, and the special figure 2 displaying process is ended.

  When the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y827; N), it is determined whether or not it is a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y843), and when it is not a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y843; N), the time is shortened. It is determined whether it is the final variation (step Y844). Here, when the falling lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined that the high-probability final variation. In addition, when the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time reduction final variation.

  Then, when it is not the high-probability final change (step Y843; N) and when it is not the time shortening final change (step Y844; N), the process proceeds to step Y850. If it is a high-probability final change (step Y843; Y) or if it is a time-shortening final change (step Y844; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y845), and a production command A setting process (step Y846) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y847), and the signal regarding the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handed playing is provided. After that, the change in the special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y850), and the special figure 2 normal process number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y851). The displayed process is terminated.

  That is, the game control device 100 generates the first special game state in which the first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the operation of the condition device is generated based on the fact that the variable display game has the first special result. Second special game generation means for forming a second special game state for opening the special variable winning device without operating the condition device, based on the fact that the variable display game has the second special result. Eggplant

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 45 shows the fanfare / inter-interval process shift setting process (steps Y764 and Y826) in the above-described special figure 1 during display processing and special figure 2 during display processing. In this fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing, first, a signal related to the start of the big hit (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y871). Here, one jackpot signal output in the big hit or small hit is set to ON, and four jackpot signals output in the big hit are set to ON.

  Next, the signal concerning the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (the variation time shortening state of the special symbol) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 variation time The shortened state signal is set to OFF and the ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is set to OFF.

  After that, the number-of-rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step Y873), the number in the low probability is saved in the gaming-state display number area (step Y874), and the special figure game mode is set. The special figure low probability, no time saving flag is saved in the flag area (step Y875). And, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area in which the universal figure time saving flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area (step Y876), and the command output to the effect control device 300 is saved when the power failure is restored. ) Is saved (step Y877). As a result, the high-probability state and the time saving state are ended, and the normal probability state and the normal state are established.

  Next, the time reduction variation number area for managing the number of games in the time saving state is cleared (step Y878), and the big hit information is saved in the special figure status area (step Y879). Further, the signal regarding the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y881). After that, since the special game state is set, information other than the normal base state is saved in the normal base state determination flag area (step Y882), and the fanfare / inter-interval process shift setting process ends.

[Processing during fanfare / interval]
46 and 47 show the fanfare / interval processing (steps Y112, Y145) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y939). If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step Y939; N), the fanfare / interval processing is ended. On the other hand, when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y939; Y), it is determined whether it is the first round (step Y940).

  If it is not the first round (step Y940; N), the process proceeds to step Y950. On the other hand, in the case of the first round (step Y940; Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 (step Y941). Here, in this embodiment, after the big hit (first special result) is derived in the special figure variation display game, the special game state is started by the game ball passing through the universal figure starting gate 34. There is. In addition, the starting condition of the special game state may be established by the game ball passing through a gate provided separately from the universal figure starting gate 34.

  If the game ball has not passed through the universal starting gate 34 (step Y941; N), the processing during the fanfare / interval ends. On the other hand, when the game ball has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 (step Y941; Y), the round number upper limit value table is prepared (step Y942), and the round number upper limit value information is loaded and prepared. (Step Y943), 2-byte data acquisition processing is performed (step Y944). The round number upper limit value (10 in the case of the present embodiment) thus obtained is saved in the round number upper limit value area (step Y945). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the acquired round number upper limit value information is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y946).

  Next, the upper special winning opening fraud prize number area is cleared (step Y947), and the fraud monitoring outside flag is saved in the upper special winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y948). After that, the ON output data of the accessory continuously operating device operating signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y949), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step Y950). Then, a round command corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is prepared (step Y951), and effect command setting processing (step Y952) is performed.

  Next, a big hit medium processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y953), and the pointer initial value is saved in the big hit medium processing control pointer area (step Y954). The special winning opening time corresponding to the mouth opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y955). The initial value of the processing control pointer during the big hit is set to 0 when opening and closing is repeated in one round. In the present embodiment, V and long opening correspond. In addition, when performing the opening once in one round, the jackpot operation end value (2 in this embodiment) is set. The initial value may be set to other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

  Next, it is determined whether it is a lever solenoid operation round (step Y956). The lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever solenoid 38f is operated to operate the lever member, and in the case of the present embodiment, it is only the first specific round. If it is the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y957). As a result, the data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared. On the other hand, if it is not the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; N), the stop data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y958).

  After that, 4 is set as the process number (step Y959), and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y960). If it is a big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y960; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y961), and the special winning opening opening time is set to the special figure 1 game processing timer area. Save to (step Y962). On the other hand, if it is not the big hit of special figure 1 (step Y960; N), that is, if it is the big hit of special figure 2, the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y963), and the special winning opening is opened. The time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y964).

  Then, the signal related to the opening of the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y965). Here, the special electric accessory 1 in-operation signal is set to ON. Next, in order to open the opening / closing member of the first special variation winning device 38, the upper special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y966), and the number of winnings to the special winning opening is counted. The special winning opening count is cleared (step Y967), and the fanfare / interval processing is ended.

  In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, in the special game state based on the big hit (first special game state), only the upper special winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is opened, In the special game state based on the small hit (second special game state), only the lower special winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) is opened, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the opening / closing mode in the first special game state may be a mode in which the upper special winning opening is opened in the first round and the lower special winning opening is opened in the second and subsequent rounds.

[Special map 1 big hit end processing]
FIG. 48 shows the special figure 1 big hit end process (step Y115) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 big hit ending process, first, a subroutine call is made based on the time reduction determination data (step Y1101). When the time reduction determination data is no time saving in step Y1101, the big hit end setting process 1 (step Y1102) is performed, and when the time reduction determination data is time saving in step Y1101, the big hit end setting process 2 ( Step Y1103) is performed.

  Then, it is determined whether there is specific area passage information (step Y1104). In the present embodiment, the specific area passage flag is set when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability change operation area), and when the specific area passage flag is set, it is determined that there is specific area passage information. .. If there is no specific area passage information (step Y1104; N), the process moves to step Y1106. On the other hand, when there is specific area passage information (step Y1104; Y), big hit end setting processing 3 (step Y1105) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1106), and the game ball to the specific area (probability change operation area) in the special game state based on the normal big hit (10R normal big hit in this embodiment) It is determined whether or not it is the inflow of the specific area irregularly (step Y1107).

  If it does not pass the specific area irregularity (step Y1107; N), the process proceeds to step Y1109. On the other hand, if it is a specific area irregular passage (step Y1107; Y), irregular probability variation information is added to the probability information command (step Y1108), and effect command setting processing (step Y1109) is performed. The probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the process of step Y1109. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands including performance mode information in one of "high probability / shortening time", "low probability / shortening time", and "low probability / shortening time". Yes, the probability variation operating area is irregularly passed, and the irregular probability variation information is added.

  Next, "0" relating to the special figure 1 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1110), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1111). Next, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1112). Here, one big hit signal and three big hit signals are set to OFF. Then, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1113). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 per signal and the special symbol 2 per signal is set to OFF.

  Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1114), the flag during fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1115), and the special figure status area is cleared. (Step Y1116). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 is displayed, which indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Then, the special figure 2 game wait time value (for example, 8 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117), and the special figure 1 big hit ending process is ended.

The special figure variation display game can be started for both special figure 1 and special figure 2 by performing the special figure 1 big hit end process, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is performed after the special figure 1 game process. In order to perform the processing, the processing for starting the special figure variation display game in the special figure 2 game processing is performed by the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 jackpot end processing, and the special figure 2 variable display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 variable display game. Will be able to start first. Therefore, in step Y1117, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area so that the start processing of the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing. The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.
That is, after the game control device 100 has finished the special game state, the second variable display game execution control means sets the second variable display game execution control means until the first variable display game execution control means can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game. A game process standby unit is provided to prevent the process related to the start of the two-variable display game from being made executable.

[Special figure 2 Big hit end processing]
FIG. 49 shows the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y148) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. The special figure 2 big hit ending processing is the same processing except that step Y1109 in the above-mentioned special figure 1 big hit processing is not performed. In the special figure 2 big hit ending process, first, a subroutine call is made based on the time reduction determination data (step Y1131). If the time reduction determination data is no time saving in step Y1131, the big hit end setting process 1 (step Y1132) is performed, and if the time reduction determination data is time saving in step Y1131, the big hit end setting process 2 ( Step Y1133) is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1134), and if there is no specific area passage information (step Y1134; N), the process proceeds to step Y1136. On the other hand, when there is specific area passage information (step Y1134; Y), big hit end setting processing 3 (step Y1135) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1136), and the game ball to the specific area (probability change operation area) in the special game state based on the normal big hit (10R normal big hit in this embodiment) It is determined whether or not it is the inflow of the specific area irregularly (step Y1137).

  If it is not a specific area irregular passage (step Y1137; N), the process proceeds to step Y1139. On the other hand, if it is a specific area irregular passage (step Y1137; Y), irregular probability variation information is added to the probability information command (step Y1138), and effect command setting processing (step Y1139) is performed. The probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the process of step Y1139. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands including performance mode information in one of "high probability / shortening time", "low probability / shortening time", and "low probability / shortening time". Yes, the probability variation operating area is irregularly passed, and the irregular probability variation information is added.

  Next, "0" relating to the special figure 2 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1140), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1141). Next, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1143). Here, one big hit signal and three big hit signals are set to OFF. Then, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1143). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 per signal and the special symbol 2 per signal is set to OFF.

  Next, the off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1144), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1145), and the special figure status area is cleared. (Step Y1146), the special figure 2 big hit ending process is ended. By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 is displayed, which indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 50A shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (steps Y1102 and 1132) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start without time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1151). Here, the two jackpot signals are set to OFF. At this point, the data is only set and not output.

Next, the signal related to the start without time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1152). Here, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal and normal electric accessory 1 Set the open extension status signal to OFF.
After that, the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1153), and the universal figure without time saving flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area (step Y1154). Next, the special figure low probability and no time saving flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1155), and the time shortening variation number area for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time saving state is set to 0. Clear (step Y1156).

  Next, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1157). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Next, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1158). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handed playing is provided. After that, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y1159), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is ended. By this processing, a normal game state is set.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 50B shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (steps Y1103 and 1133) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1161). Here, the two jackpot signals are set to ON. Incidentally, the jackpot 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and is kept going.

Next, the signal related to the start with the time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1162). Here, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal and normal electric accessory 1 Set the open extension status signal to ON.
After that, the number with time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1163), and the universal figure time reduction flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area (step Y1164). Next, the special figure low probability and time saving flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1165), and the initial value is set in the time reduction variation number area for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time saving state. The value is saved (step Y1166). In the case of the present embodiment, since the support count is 100, 100 is saved as the initial value in step Y1166.

  Then, the probability information command (time saving) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y1167), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. By this process, the special game low probability second specific game state. In the case of the present embodiment, the right hit mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right hit mode is set from during the big hit, the big hit end setting process 2 does not perform the right hit setting.

[Big hit end setting process 3]
FIG. 51 shows the jackpot end setting process 3 (steps Y1105 and Y1135) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In the jackpot end setting process 3, first, a signal relating to the start of special time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1171). Here, the two jackpot signals are set to ON. Incidentally, the jackpot 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and is kept going.

  Next, the signal related to the start with high probability and time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1172). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to ON. After that, the number with time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1173), and the special figure high probability and time reduction flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1174).

Next, the signal related to the right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1175). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number in the right hit state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1176). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned on, and the display for instructing the right-handed is given. After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step Y1177), and the jackpot end setting process 3 ends. By this processing, a high probability state is achieved. That is, by executing the big hit end setting process 1 and then the big hit end setting process 3, it becomes the first specific game state. By executing the big hit end setting process 2 and then the big hit end setting process 3, the special figure high probability is increased. It becomes the second specific game state.
Through the above processing, it is possible to set the specific game state that is a high probability state after the end of the first special game state. That is, the game control device 100 has a specific game state (first specific game state ST2, second special game state ST3 with high special figure probability) in which the probability that the result of the special variation display game is a special result is higher than the normal state. It constitutes a specific game state generating means capable of generating.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
FIG. 52 shows the small hitting fanfare middle processing (step Y149) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing. In this small hitting fanfare middle processing, first, the small big winning opening opening command is prepared (step Y1201), and the effect command setting processing (step Y1202) is performed. Next, 8 which is involved in the small hitting process is set as the process number (step Y1203), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1204).

  Then, the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1205), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation (the special electric auditors 2 working signal is ON) is a test signal. The data is saved in the output data area (step Y1206). Then, the lower big prize hole on data is saved in the big prize hole solenoid output data area (step Y1207), and the big prize hole count number area for counting the number of prizes to the big prize hole is cleared (step Y1208). The processing during the hit fanfare ends.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 53 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y152) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 related to special figure 2 normal process is set as a process number (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

  Next, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag region (step Y1334), the off number is saved in the round LED pointer region (step Y1335), and the special figure status region is cleared ( Step Y1336). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game become special figure status 0 indicating a state in which neither the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special map low probability & no time saving is in progress (during normal game state) (step Y1337). To do. If the special figure low probability & time saving is not in progress (step Y1337; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1338). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1339), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (step Y1340).

  If the special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended (step Y1340; N), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (step Y1340; Y), a decorative special figure 1 restart command is prepared (step Y1341), and effect command setting processing (step Y1342) is performed. Then, the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended. As a result, when the special game state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is finished, the special figure 2 variable display game that has been interrupted is restarted.

  That is, the game control device 100 is controlled by one of the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) and the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) by the variable display game execution control means. When the execution control of the variable display game is performed, when the other variable display game whose execution control is performed by the other variable display game execution control means has a special result, one of the variable display games is displayed. The resuming control means is capable of executing resuming control for resuming one of the variable display games which has been interrupted and then resumed the one variable display game which has been interrupted after the special game state based on the other variable display game ends.

[Public game processing]
Next, details of the universal figure game process (step X114) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the general figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process relating to the general figure variation display game is controlled, the display of the general figure is set, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 54, in the universal figure game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a universal electric prize switch for monitoring an input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the universal figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the universal figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the universal figure game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

  When the value of the universal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already expired, it is referred to branch to the processing corresponding to the universal figure game processing number. The general-purpose game sequence branch table is prepared in the register (step B5), the general-purpose game processing number is loaded and prepared (step B6), and 2-byte data acquisition processing is performed (step B7). Thereby, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the universal figure game processing number is obtained from the universal figure game sequence branch table, and the subroutine call by the universal figure game processing number is performed (step B8).

In step B8, if the general figure game processing number is "0", the start of fluctuation of the general figure variable display game is monitored, and setting of change start and effect setting of the general figure variable display game, and during general figure fluctuation An ordinary figure ordinary process (step B9) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.
If the figure game process number is "1" at step B8, a figure figure changing process (step B10) is executed to set information necessary for performing the figure image displaying process.

Further, in step B8, if the universal figure game processing number is "2" and the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, setting of the universal battery open time depending on whether or not the time saving state is in effect. In addition, processing for displaying a general figure (step B11) for setting information necessary for performing the processing for a general figure is performed.
Further, in step B8, if the universal figure game processing number is "3", the processing during the universal figure hitting is continued, or the information necessary for performing the ordinary electric ball remaining ball processing is set The process (step B12) is performed.

When the universal figure game process number is "4" at step B8, the ordinary electric ball remaining process (step B13) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the universal figure end process.
Further, in step B8, when the figure / universal figure game processing number is "5", the figure / universal figure end processing (step B14) for setting the information necessary for performing the figure / universal figure ordinary processing is performed.

After that, after preparing the universal figure fluctuation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal figure indicator (step B15), the symbol variation control processing which relates to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal figure display section 58 (step B16) is performed, and the ordinary figure game process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step B4 that the value of the universal figure game processing timer is not "0" (step B4; N), that is, the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step B15 and the subsequent processes are performed. To do.

[Processing during normal figure display]
Next, details of the general figure displaying process (step B11) in the above general figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the normal figure displaying process, first, the hit flag (hit information or off information) set in the normal figure normal process is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

  When the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), "0" which is related to the normal figure normal process is set as the process number (step B520), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step). B521). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B522), and the processing for displaying the universal figure ends.

  On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), a hitting process setting table is prepared (step B504), and the universal figure stop symbol information is loaded and prepared (step B505), 2 bytes. Data acquisition processing is performed (step B506). Thereby, the hit start pointer value and the hit end pointer value corresponding to the universal figure stop symbol information are acquired from the hitting process setting table.

  Then, the obtained value of the hit start pointer (for example, "0" or "5") is saved in the control pointer area during the normal hit (step B507), and the obtained value of the hit end pointer (for example, "4"). Or, "7") is saved in the end pointer area per universal figure (step B508). Next, prepare the universal electric open time table (step B509), load the universal figure stop symbol information and prepare (step B510), and perform 2-byte data acquisition processing (step B511). As a result, the ordinary electric opening time corresponding to the universal figure stop symbol information is acquired from the ordinary electric opening time table. Then, the obtained opening time (1700 msec or 2600 msec, for example) is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B512).

  Next, "3" is set as the process number for shifting to the process of hitting a normal figure (step B513), and the process number is saved in the figure game process number area (step B514). After that, a signal related to the start of hitting the universal figure variation display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 hitting signal is ON) and a signal related to the start of normal electric actuation (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is ON) are test signals. The data is saved in the output data area (step B515) and a signal for driving (turning on) the universal solenoid is output, so the on data is saved in the ordinary solenoid output data area (step B516).

  Further, the information on the Poden count number area that stores the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is cleared (step B517), and the number of winnings to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 during the regular electricity fraud monitoring period is stored in Hoden. The information of the illegal prize number area is cleared (step B518). Then, the flag (outside fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B519), and the processing for displaying the universal figure is ended.

[2-byte data acquisition process]
FIG. 56 shows a 2-byte data acquisition process (steps Y107, Y140, Y944, B7) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing, special figure 2 game processing, fanfare / interval processing, general figure game processing, and general figure display processing. , B506, B511). In the 2-byte data acquisition process, first, the value of the register input as the pointer is doubled (step Y971), and the calculated value is added to the register input as the reference address (step Y972). Then, 2-byte data is acquired from the address after the addition (step Y973), and the 2-byte data acquisition process is ended.

[Design fluctuation control processing]
FIG. 57 shows the symbol variation control process (steps Y117, Y154, B16) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing, special figure 2 game processing, and universal figure game processing. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol and setting the display data of the special symbol on the special symbol 1 display device 51, the special symbol 2 display device 52, and the universal symbol display unit 58. In this symbol variation control process, first, the address of the variation control flag of the symbol to be controlled (special figure 1, special figure 2 or general figure) is acquired (step Y1401), and whether the symbol to be controlled is changing or not. Check (step Y1402).

  When the fluctuation control flag is changing (step Y1403; Y), the symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1404), and the blink control timer for the symbol to be controlled is acquired. The area is prepared (step Y1405), 1-byte subtraction processing is performed to update the blinking control timer related to the symbol to be controlled by -1 (step Y1406), and the value of the timer is 0, that is, whether the time is up. The determination is made (step Y1407).

  When the value of the blink control timer is not 0 (step Y1407; N), the process proceeds to step Y1412. If the value of the blink control timer is 0 (step Y1407; Y), the blink control timer initial value (100 ms in this case) is saved in the blink control timer area of the control target (step Y1408), and the symbol of the control target. The variable symbol number area relating to (1) is prepared (step Y1409), and the variable symbol number upper limit determination value (common to special symbols / general figures) is prepared (step Y1410). Then, the 1-byte addition process is performed to update the variable symbol number related to the symbol to be controlled by +1 (step Y1411), and the display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area of the target is acquired (step Y1412). After that, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1415), and the symbol variation control process ends.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation control flag is not changing (step Y1403; N), the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1413). Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step Y1414), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1415), and the symbol variation control process is ended. Thereby, among the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the general figure display section 58, the special figure or the general figure corresponding to the symbol number on the special figure display or the general figure display section 58 to be controlled. Will be displayed.

[1 byte subtraction process]
FIG. 58 shows the 1-byte subtraction process (step Y1406) in the symbol variation control process described above. In the 1-byte subtraction process, first, it is determined whether the content of the target area is 0 (step Y1421), and if it is 0 (step Y1421; Y), the 1-byte subtraction process ends. If it is not 0 (step Y1421; N), the contents of the target area are updated by -1 (step Y1422), and the 1-byte subtraction process is terminated.

[1 byte addition process]
FIG. 59 shows the 1-byte addition process (step Y1411) in the symbol variation control process described above. In the 1-byte addition processing, first, the content of the target area is loaded (step Y1431), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step Y1432), and it is determined whether the updated value is smaller than the upper limit determination value (step Y1431). Y1433).

  When the updated value is smaller than the upper limit judgment value (step Y1433; Y), the updated value is saved in the target area (step Y1435), and the 1-byte addition process is ended. If the update value is not smaller than the upper limit judgment value (step Y1433; N), 0 is set as the update value (step Y1434), and the update value is saved in the target area (step Y1435), 1 byte. The addition process ends.

[Production command setting process]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 60, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step X601), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step X602). When the rendering serial transmission buffer is full (step X602; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the rendering serial transmission buffer (step X601). If the performance serial transmission buffer is not full (step X602; N), the command data (MODE) is written in the performance serial transmission buffer (step X603).

  Next, the status of the production serial transmission buffer is read (step X604), and it is determined whether the production serial transmission buffer is full (step X605). When the production serial transmission buffer is full (step X605; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the production serial transmission buffer (step X604). If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step X605; N), the command data (ACTION) is written in the effect serial transmission buffer (step X606), and the effect command setting process ends.

  In the above-mentioned example, the starting condition of the special game state is that the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34 after the special result is derived, but as a modified example, only the special result is derived in the special game state. It may be used as a start condition. In this case, the processes of FIGS. 61 to 64 are performed.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
The special figure 1 displaying process shown in FIG. 61 is performed instead of the special figure 1 displaying process shown in FIG. In the special figure 1 displaying process, when special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y753; Y), steps Y942 to Y946, which were performed in the fanfare / interval processing shown in FIG. 46, are performed. In addition, in the process (step Y754) of saving the test signal related to the start of the big hit of the special figure 1 variation display game (special figure 1 big hit) in the test signal output data area, the condition device operating signal is turned ON and the special symbol 1 hit signal In addition to turning ON, the ON signal of the accessory continuously operating device is turned ON.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
The special figure 2 displaying process shown in FIG. 62 is performed instead of the special figure 1 displaying process shown in FIG. In the special figure 2 displaying process, when the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y815; Y), steps Y942 to Y946, which were performed in the fanfare / interval processing shown in FIG. 46, are performed. Further, in the process of saving the test signal related to the start of the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game (special figure 2 big hit) in the test signal output data area (step Y816), the condition device operating signal is ON and the special symbol 2 hit signal In addition to turning ON, the ON signal of the accessory continuously operating device is turned ON.

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 63 shows the fanfare / inter-interval process shift setting process (steps Y764, Y826) in the special figure 1 displaying process shown in FIG. 61 and the special figure 2 displaying process shown in FIG. 62. In this fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing, first, a signal related to the start of the big hit (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y871). Here, the jackpot 1 signal output in the jackpot or the jackpot is set to ON. Next, the signal concerning the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (the variation time shortening state of the special symbol) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 variation time The shortened state signal is set to OFF and the ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is set to OFF.

  After that, the number-of-rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step Y873), the number in the low probability is saved in the gaming-state display number area (step Y874), and the special figure game mode is set. The special figure low probability, no time saving flag is saved in the flag area (step Y875).

  And, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area in which the universal figure time saving flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area (step Y876), and the command output to the effect control device 300 is saved when the power failure is restored. ) Is saved (step Y877), and the time-reduced variation number area for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state is cleared (step Y878). As a result, the high-probability state and the time-saving operation state are ended, and the normal probability state and the normal operation state are entered.

  Next, the big hit information is saved in the special figure status area (step Y879), the signal relating to the right hit instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and the right hit state is displayed in the game state display number 2 area. The number is saved (step Y881). After that, the number of fraudulent winning a prize special prize area is cleared (step Y882), the fraud monitoring outside flag is saved in the flag fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y883), and the fanfare / interval processing shift setting process is performed. To finish.

  Note that the processing from step Y871 to Y882 is also performed in the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (steps Y764 and Y826) in the processing for displaying special figure 1 shown in FIG. 42 and the processing for displaying special figure 2 shown in FIG. There is.

[Processing during fanfare / interval]
The fanfare / interval processing shown in FIG. 64 is performed instead of the fanfare / interval processing shown in FIG. In this fanfare / interval processing, steps Y940 to Y949 are not performed. These processes are performed by the processes of FIGS. 61 to 63.

  FIG. 65 shows an example of the data structure of the ROM 111B provided in the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100. As shown in FIG. 65, in the ROM 111B, in order from the beginning, a game control program area 111Ba, a first unused area 11Bb, a game control data area 111Bc, a second unused area 111Bd, a performance display program and a performance display program. A data area 111Be, a third unused area 111Bf and a program management area 111Bg are provided.

  The game control program area 111Ba is provided with an area for storing a game control program used for game control such as the above-described main processing and timer interrupt processing, and the game control data area 111Bc is used for a big hit determination. There is provided an area for storing game control data used by the game control program, such as an upper limit judgment value table area for storing an upper limit judgment value table. The game control program forms the first program, the game control data forms the first data, and these areas form the first storage area. The first unused area 11Bb between the game control program area 111Ba and the game control data area 111Bc may be included in the first storage area.

  The performance display program and performance display data area 111Be is provided with an area for storing a program and data, which will be described later, necessary for calculating the base value and the accessory ratio and displaying it on the performance display device 153. The performance display program forms the second program, the performance display data forms the second data, and these areas form the second storage area.

  In the program management area 111Bg, a vector table area for storing a table for setting the start address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction and the start address of the timer interrupt process, and for setting the internal function of the gaming microcomputer 111 by hardware. The HW (hardware) parameter area for storing the parameters, the area for storing the model name, the manufacturer name, and the like are provided. The information in this program management area 111Bg is used by the game control program.

  As described above, the ROM 111B stores programs and data used by the game control device 100. That is, the ROM 111B forms a first storage unit that stores programs and data used by the game control device 100.

  FIG. 66 shows an example of the data structure of the RAM 111C provided in the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100. As shown in FIG. 66, the RAM 111C has a game control work area 111Ca, a game control stack area 111Cb, an unused area 111Cc, and a performance display program work area, which are work areas for the game control program, in order from the beginning. A performance display work area 111Cd and a performance display stack area 111Ce are provided. An unused area may be provided after the performance display stack area.

  In the game control work area 111Ca, a probability setting value area for storing probability value setting values in order from the beginning, a power failure inspection area 1 for storing power failure inspection area check data 1 when a power failure occurs, and a probability setting value changing mode. In this case, a probability setting mode flag area for storing a probability setting changing flag is provided. In addition to this, for example, an initial value random number area for storing initial values of various random numbers, a variation pattern random number area for storing variation pattern random numbers, and the like are provided areas for storing information on game control.

  Further, a normal base state determination flag area for storing a normal base state determination flag indicating a state other than a special game state or a specific game state for calculating the base value, an initial display when the power is turned on in the performance display device 153. An initial display setting flag area for storing an initial display setting flag for setting is set. Further, a power failure inspection area 2 for storing power failure inspection area check data 2 when a power failure occurs, and a checksum area for storing checksum data when a power failure occurs are provided. The game control work area 111Ca constitutes a first work area which is a work area of the game control program which constitutes the first program. The game control stack area 111Cb may be included as the first work area.

  In the performance display work area 111Cd, a normal prize ball number counter area for counting the number of prize balls acquired in the normal game state which is neither the special game state nor the specific game state in order from the beginning, and the game area in the normal game state A normal out counter area for counting the number of game balls discharged from 32 and a total out counter area for counting the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 are provided regardless of the game state.

  Further, as an area for storing display data of each 7-segment display in the performance display device 153 composed of four 7-segment display arranged side by side, four output data areas of the first to fourth digit output data areas are provided. It is provided. The four 7-segment displays lined up on the left and right are the first digit, the second digit, the third digit, and the fourth digit in order from the right. In addition to this, a stack pointer storage area is provided. The performance display work area 111Cd forms a second work area which is a work area of the performance display program forming the second program. The performance display stack area 111Ce may be included as the second work area.

  As described above, the RAM 111C is provided with a work area for programs used by the game control device 100. That is, the RAM 111C serves as a second storage unit that provides a work area of a program used by the game control device 100.

  FIG. 67 schematically shows reading and writing of data. In principle, the first work area 111Ca is read and written by the first program (game control program) in the first storage area 111Ba. Further, the second work area 111Cd is read and written by the second program (performance display program) in the second storage area 111Be. Further, the first work area 111Ca has an area read from the second program, and the second work area has an area read from the first program.

  The first work area 111Ca includes a first dedicated area 111Ca1 that is read and written only by the first program and a first common area 111Ca2 that is at least written by the first program and read by the second program. The first program may also be read from the first common area 111Ca2. Examples of the first common area 111Ca2 include a normal base state determination flag area, an initial display setting flag area, and an area for storing a flag indicating that a special winning opening fraud or a universal telephone fraud is occurring. Examples of the 1-dedicated area 111Ca1 include areas of the first work area other than these.

  Regarding the normal base state determination flag area forming the first common area 111Ca2, since the state of the normal base state determination flag area is not confirmed when the first program saves the flag, the first program only writes. The two programs only read and do not write. Also, the initial display setting flag area that forms the first common area 111Ca2 and the area that stores the flag indicating that the special winning opening fraud or the general electric power fraud is occurring are stored when the first program saves the flag. First, the state of the area is read, and if not set, the flag is saved. That is, the first program reads and writes, and the second program only reads but does not write. Regarding the initial display setting flag area and the area for storing the flag indicating that the special winning opening fraud is occurring or the universal telephone fraud is occurring, the initial display setting flag is set when the first program saves the flag. The state of the flag area may be written without being read.

  The second work area 111Cd has a second dedicated area 111Cd1 that is read and written only by the second program and a second common area 111Cd2 that is written by the second program and read by the first program. The second program may also be read from the second common area 111Cd2. The second common area 111Cd2 includes a first-digit output data area, a second-digit output data area, a third-digit output data area, and a fourth-digit output data area. There are two work areas. Regarding the first digit output data area, the second digit output data area, the third digit output data area and the fourth digit output data area which form the second common area 111Cd2, when the second program saves the information, Since the status is not confirmed, the second program only writes. Also, the first program only reads and does not write.

  As described above, by dividing the storage area in the ROM 111B and the work area in the RAM 111C for the game control program and data and the performance display program and data, the development efficiency can be improved. In particular, the game control program is different for each model, but since the performance display program is a program common to all models or a program with a common algorithm, it is possible to store these separately. In the process of development, the part to be modified and the part not to be modified become clear, and the efficiency of development can be improved. Further, by dividing the area corresponding to the performance display program also in the RAM 111C, the usable area for the game control program becomes clear during the development process, and the development efficiency can be improved. In addition, by providing a dedicated area that is used only by the program corresponding to the work area and a common area that is also used by the program that does not correspond to the work area, the area referenced by other programs becomes clear and The efficiency can be increased.

  The first common area 111Ca2 and the second common area 111Cd2 accessed from both the game control program and the performance display program are provided in the work area corresponding to the program on the information writing side. It may be provided in a work area corresponding to the program on the reading side. Further, here, the ROM 111B and the RAM 111C of the game control device 100 are given as an example, but the production control device 300 and other control devices can be similarly divided into regions and set. Further, the area is divided by the game control program and the performance display program, but the invention is not limited to this, and the area is divided into a program that is not changed in the development process and a program that is changed in the development process. You may do it.

[Performance display monitor control processing]
FIG. 68 shows the performance display monitor control processing (step X122) in the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. This performance display monitor control process constitutes one of performance display programs. In this performance display monitor control process, first, the stack pointer is saved in the stack pointer storage area provided in the work for performance display (step X201), and the initial value for performance display control is set in the stack pointer (step X202). ..

  Next, all the registers (both register banks 0 and 1) are saved in the performance display stack area (step X203), and the second work RAM check processing for checking the performance display work area of the RAM 111C is performed (step X204). ). In the second work RAM check process, when an abnormality is found in the performance display work area, the performance display work area is cleared to 0, and an initial value is set to an area that requires an initial value other than 0. The stack pointer storage area and the performance display stack area are not cleared to zero.

  After that, the initial display timer updating process for displaying the performance display device when the power is turned on is performed (step X205), and the switch detection information of the first work (work area for game control) is set to the second work (work for performance display). Area). In this process, the input port information (rising edge) is copied. At this time, information about the switch that is not necessary for calculating the base value is deleted. The switches required for calculating the base value are the winning opening switches 35a, 35b, 35c of the general winning openings 351 to 354, the first special variation winning device 38, and the large winning opening switches 38a, 39a of the second special variation winning device 39. The start opening 1 switch 36a of the start winning opening 36, the start opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variation winning device 37, and the out ball detection switch 32a for detecting all the game balls that have been launched into the game area 32 and finished the game. ..

  Next, a display content update process is performed (step X207). In the display content update processing, the display mode displayed on the performance display device is managed, and the display data is set in the first to fourth digit data areas of the performance display work area. Then, all the registers are restored (step X208), the value of the stack pointer storage area is loaded into the stack pointer (step X209), and the performance display monitor control processing ends.

[Initial display timer update process]
69 shows the initial display timer updating process (step X205) in the performance display monitor control process shown in FIG. This initial display timer update process constitutes one of the performance display programs. In the initial display timer updating process, first, it is determined whether the initial display setting flag that is turned on when the power is turned on is on (step X221). The initial display setting flag is stored in the initial display setting flag area of the game control work that is the first work area that forms the work area of the game control program that is the first program. Therefore, this process is a process in which the performance display program that is the second program reads the information of the first work area.

  If the initial display setting flag is not on (step X221; N), that is, if the initial display timer updating process is not executed after the power is turned on, the process proceeds to step X225. When the initial display setting flag is on (step X221; Y), that is, when the initial display timer updating process is executed for the first time after the power is turned on, the timer initial value is saved in the initial display timer area ( Step X222). Here, the value corresponding to 4800 ms is saved. Next, the timer initial value is saved in the blink control timer area (step X223). Here, the value corresponding to 300 ms is saved.

  After that, the initial value is saved in the blinking control pointer area (step X224), and if the initial display timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X225), and the initial display timer update processing ends. Here, 0 and 1 are prepared as the value of the blink control pointer, and the value is switched every time the blink control timer times out. When the value of the blinking control pointer is 0, all the segments of the performance display device are turned on, and when the value of the blinking control pointer is 1, all the segments of the performance display device are turned off. As a result, an initial display is performed in which all lighting and all lighting are repeated every 300 ms for 4800 ms.

[Performance display editing process]
70 shows the performance display editing process (step X55) in the main process shown in FIG. This performance display editing process is one of the performance display programs. In this performance display editing process, first, the stack pointer is saved in the stack pointer storage area (step X231), and an initial value for performance display control is set in the stack pointer (step X232). Next, all registers are saved (step X233), and a second work RAM check process for checking the performance display work area of the RAM 111C is performed (step X234).

  Next, it is determined whether it is the timing of switching the management section (step X235). The management section is a section for calculating the base value, and here, the section is switched every time the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 reaches 60000. If it is the switching timing of the management section (step X235; Y), initial setting at the time of section switching is performed (step X236), and the process proceeds to step X240.

  In the initial setting when the section is switched, the normal prize ball number counter area for counting the number of prize balls obtained in the normal game state which is neither the special game state nor the specific game state, and the game discharged from the game area in the normal game state The values of the normal out counter area for counting the number of balls and the total out counter area for counting the number of game balls discharged from the game area are cleared regardless of the game state. In addition, the section final data, which is the last calculated base value in the section to be ended, is shifted to the area for storing the base value for the past section. In the area that stores the base values for the past sections, at least the base values for the latest three sections are stored in chronological order, and the newly stored base values are the base values of the section that ended most recently. The base value is stored in the area for storing the value and the already stored base value is sequentially shifted one by one to the old area.

  On the other hand, if it is not the switching timing of the management section (step X235; N), it is determined whether any of the monitored switches has an input (step X237). The switch to be monitored is a switch necessary for calculating the base value, and here, the winning opening switches 35a, 35b, and 35c of the general winning openings 351 to 354, the first special variation winning device 38, and the second special variation winning device 39 are included. Large winning opening switches 38a, 39a, starting opening 1 switch 36a of the starting winning opening 36, starting opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variation winning device 37, and all game balls that have been launched into the game area 32 and have finished the game The ball detection switch 32a corresponds.

  As the input information of these switches, the information copied to the performance display work area in step X206 in the performance display monitor control processing (see FIG. 68) is used. This is because the performance display editing process is performed in the loop process of the main process, so it is performed at a faster cycle than the timer interrupt process, so if you directly use the input information of the switch used for control in the timer interrupt process, one input information will be This is because there is a risk of counting multiple times.

  When there is an input to any of the monitored switches (step X237; Y), prize ball addition determination processing is performed (step X238), and the process proceeds to step X240. In the prize ball addition determination processing, the number of prize balls corresponding to the input winning switch is added to the normal prize ball counter. If the out-ball detection switch is input, the normal out counter and the total out counter are incremented.

  Counters other than the total out counter are incremented only in the normal gaming state and when the special winning opening fraud or the universal telephone fraud is not occurring. The addition to the total out counter is added regardless of the game state. Whether it is in the normal game state is determined by referring to the normal base state information stored in the game control work. In addition, whether or not the special winning opening fraud or the universal telephone fraud is occurring is determined by referring to the flag stored in the game control work and indicating that the corresponding fraud is occurring. That is, the area for storing the normal base state information in the game control work, the information indicating that the special winning opening fraud is occurring, or the normal electric wire fraud is occurring is an area that is read by the performance display program that is the second program. ..

  Here, the special winning a prize fraud is the number of winnings to the special variable winning device in a state where the special variable winning device is not opened in each of the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39. A certain first abnormal prize number is counted, and when the first abnormal prize number reaches a predetermined number, a flag is set as a first abnormal state indicating that a special winning opening fraud is occurring. In addition, the fraudulent charge is the second abnormal prize number which is the number of prizes to the normal variable prize device 37 in the state where the normal variable prize device 37 is not opened, and the second abnormal prize number is set to a predetermined number. When it reaches, the flag is set as the second abnormal state indicating that the illegality of universal communication is occurring.

  Therefore, even if the special variable prize device is closed and there is a prize in the special variable prize device, it is used for calculating the normal base value instead of the fraudulent winning prize until the first abnormal prize number reaches a predetermined number. It is possible. Further, even if the normal variable winning device 37 is closed and a prize is awarded to the normal variable winning device 37, the normal base value is not calculated until the second abnormal prize number reaches a predetermined number, which is not a normal charge. It can be used.

  In addition, in one prize ball addition determination process, one switch is processed, and information about the processed switch is cleared, so that a plurality of switches are sequentially processed. ing. Since the performance display editing process in which the prize sphere addition determination process is performed is performed in the loop process in the main process, the performance display editing process is performed multiple times at intervals of the timer interrupt process. The plurality of times is at least the number of switches monitored in the prize ball addition determination process.

When there is no input to any of the switches to be monitored (step X237; N), the division task processing is executed (step X239), all registers are restored (step X240), and the value of the stack pointer storage area is stacked. It is loaded into the pointer (step X241), and the performance display editing process ends. In the division task processing, the normal base value is calculated according to the following formula. The calculated value is rounded off to one decimal place.
Normal base value = (value of normal prize ball number counter) ÷ (value of normal out counter) × 100
The calculated base value is displayed in the performance display device by being set in the first to fourth digit output data areas in the display content update processing (step X207) of the performance display monitor control processing (see FIG. 68) described above. Like

[Output processing]
FIG. 71 shows the output process (step X105) in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. This output process constitutes one of the game control programs. In this output process, first, OFF data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step X271). Next, the data output to the output port 134 which outputs the data of the ordinary electric solenoid 37c, the special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, and the lever solenoid 38f is combined and output (step X272).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step X273), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (step X273). X274). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step X275), and the combined data (for example, "door / frame open" data, "security signal" data) is output to a digit / external information output port. It is output to 136 (step X276).

  After that, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RAM 111C corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step X277), and the loaded data is output to the segment output output port 135 (step X278). In this embodiment, when the value of the digit counter is 0, the digit line and segment line of the special figure 1 display unit 51 are selected, and when the value of the digit counter is 1, the digit line of the special figure 2 display unit 52 is selected. And the segment line is selected. Further, when the digit counter value is 2, the digit line and segment line of the universal figure display section 58 are selected, and when the digit counter value is 3, the special figure 1 hold indicator 53, the special figure 2 hold display The digit line and the segment line of the container 54, the universal figure reservation display unit 59, the first game state display unit 56, the time saving state notification unit 60, the probability display unit 57, and the round display unit 55 are selected. As a result, the plurality of light emitting display units provided in the collective display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

  Subsequently, various output data of external information are combined (step X279), and the combined data (for example, "big hit signal 1" data, "big hit signal 2" data, "big hit signal 3" data, "big hit signal" 4 ”data,“ symbol fixed number of times signal ”data,“ starting mouth signal ”data,“ main prize ball signal ”data) and output data of permission to launch (step X280), and the combined data The external information / launch permission signal is output to the output port 137 (step X281).

  Next, it is determined whether the initial display setting flag that is turned on when the power is turned on is on (step X282). When the initial display setting flag is on (step X282; Y), that is, when the first output process is executed after the power is turned on, the 1st to 4th digit output data of the performance display device is loaded and output. The process shifts to step X287 without performing the processing (steps X283 to X286). This is because the data of the performance display device is not set in this case.

  If the initial display setting flag is not on (step X282; N), that is, if the first output process after power-on is not executed, the output data of the first to fourth digits of the performance display device is loaded and output. Processing (steps X283 to X286) is performed. As a result, the 7-segment display of each digit of the performance display is displayed. The 1st to 4th digit output data of the performance display device is set in the 1st to 4th digit output data area in the display content update process (step X207) of the above-mentioned performance display monitor control process (see FIG. 68).

  That is, the first to fourth digit output data areas provided in the second work area are written by the performance display program which is the second program, and are read by the game control program which is the first program. It is what makes up. As described above, the performance display monitor control process is performed in the loop process in the main process, and the execution interval is not always constant, so that it is not suitable for dynamically controlling the performance display device 153. Therefore, the display data set in the performance display monitor control process is read in the output process performed in the timer interrupt process to control the display of the performance display device 153.

  After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step X287). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step X288).

  Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step X289). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70, which outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step X290). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step X291), the output process ends.

  The output data of the segment line corresponding to each digit line is set in the segment area for each display provided in the RAM 111C (RWM) in the process described later. Specifically, it is set in the symbol variation control process (see FIG. 54) in the special figure game process shown in FIG. 27 and the universal figure game process shown in FIG. 56, and the segment LED editing process shown in FIG. Since all of these processes are performed in one timer interrupt process, output data corresponding to all the segment lines are set in the segment area in the RAM 111C regardless of the value of the digit counter. Then, out of the segment line output data set in this way, the segment line output data corresponding to the value of the digit counter this time is selected and used.

  Further, as described above, the RAM 111C is configured to be able to retain the stored data even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. In the RAM 111C, the segment area for storing the output data of the segment line and the area for storing the value of the digit counter are the checksum calculation targets in the checksum calculation processing executed when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. It is included in the area that becomes. Therefore, it is an object of the validity determination performed when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted. Thereby, when the gaming machine is normally restored from the power failure, the display of the collective display device 50 can be resumed from the state at the time of the power failure.

  72 (a) to 72 (d) show an example of a method of displaying the performance display on the performance display device 153. As shown in FIG. Note that, here, three or more sections that have been divided each time the value of the total out counter reaches a predetermined value (here, 60000) have already been completed, and the normal base value of each section is stored. State.

  In the display on the performance display device 153, the real-time normal base value in the current section shown in FIG. 72 (a), the normal base value in the previous section shown in FIG. 72 (b), and the display in FIG. 72 ( The display of the normal base value in the section two times before shown in c) and the display of the normal base value in the section three times before shown in FIG. 72D are switched and displayed every 5 seconds. When the display of the performance display device 153 is started after the power is turned on, an initial display is repeated for 4800 ms in which all the lighting and all the turning off of all the segments including dots are repeated every 300 ms.

In the display of the real-time normal base value in the current section shown in FIG. 72 (a), the third digit and the fourth digit counted from the right are displayed as an indication that the display is the real-time normal base value in the current section. "BL." Is displayed on the identification segment composed of the 7-segment display. Then, the real-time normal base value in the current section is displayed on the ratio segment composed of the first-segment and second-digit 7-segment indicator. Here, "35" is displayed. In addition, the normal base value is calculated according to the following mathematical formula, and the calculated value is rounded off to one decimal place.
Normal base value = (value of normal prize ball number counter) ÷ (value of normal out counter) × 100
If the value after rounding off to one decimal place is 100 or more, it is displayed as “99.” in the ratio segment. When the value of the normal out counter is 0, "00" is displayed in the ratio segment.

  In the display of the normal base value in the section before the one time shown in FIG. 72 (b), the 7-segment display at the third digit and the fourth digit is displayed as the display indicating that the normal base value in the section before the one time is displayed. "B1." Is displayed on the identification segment composed of. Then, the normal base value in the previous section is displayed in the ratio segment composed of the first-segment and second-segment 7-segment indicators. The method of calculating and displaying the normal base value is the same as in the case of FIG.

  In the display of the normal base value in the section two times before shown in FIG. 72 (c), “b2.” Is displayed in the identification segment as a display indicating that the normal base value in the section two times before is displayed. Then, in the ratio segment, the normal base value in the section two times before is displayed. The method of calculating and displaying the normal base value is the same as in the case of FIG. In the display of the normal base value in the section three times before shown in FIG. 72 (d), "b3." Is displayed in the identification segment as a display indicating that the normal base value is displayed in the section three times before. Then, the normal base value in the section three times before is displayed in the ratio segment. The method of calculating and displaying the normal base value is the same as in the case of FIG.

  FIG. 73 shows an example of the contents of performance display after the first power-on of the gaming machine. FIG. 73 (a) shows a section break from the first power-on of the gaming machine. The initial power-on of the gaming machine includes a state immediately after the game machine is powered on for the first time and immediately after the contents of the performance display work are reset due to some abnormality.

  The section A started from the first power-on ends when the total number of game balls (out balls and safe balls) discharged from the game area reaches 300 regardless of the game state. In this section A, an accurate base value cannot be calculated because a game ball is shot or a prize is won in the game machine due to inspection or adjustment of the game machine, so the normal base value during this period is not subject to evaluation.

  When the section A ends, the section B starts as a new section. This section B ends when the number of all game balls (out balls and safe balls) discharged from the game area reaches 60000 from the start of the section regardless of the game state. When the section B ends, the normal base value calculated from the counting result over the entire period in the section B is stored, and the section C is started as a new section. This section C ends when the number of all game balls (out balls and safe balls) discharged from the game area reaches 60000 from the start of the section regardless of the game state. Thereafter, every time the number of all game balls (out balls and safe balls) discharged from the game area reaches 60,000 from the start of the section, regardless of the game state, the normal base value for the section that ends is saved. Start a new section.

  FIG. 73 (b) shows an example of the display on the performance display device 153 in each section shown in FIG. 73 (a). The real time display of bL. Then, in the case of the section A, “bL.” Is displayed blinking on the identification segment and “—” is displayed on the ratio segment. The value of section A is not evaluated, so no numerical value is displayed. In the section B or later, when the value of the normal out counter is less than 6000, “bL.” Is displayed blinking on the identification segment, and when the value of the normal out counter is 6000 or more, “bL.” Is displayed on the identification segment. Is lit up. A value calculated in real time is displayed in the ratio segment. When the value of the normal out counter is less than 6000, the reliability of the value is low, and this is indicated by the blinking display of the identification segment.

  It is a display in the section one time before b1. , Which is the display in the section two times before b2. Which is a display in the section three times before b3. For the values, except for the value of the section A, if the corresponding values are not stored, “b1.”, “B2.” Or “b3.” Is displayed blinking on the identification segment and “-” is displayed on the ratio segment. indicate. If the corresponding values are stored, "b1.", "B2." Or "b3." Is displayed in the identification segment and the value is displayed in the ratio segment. The value displayed in the ratio segment here is the normal base value calculated at the end of the corresponding section.

  From the above, when the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and the result of the game is the special result, the control means for performing the control related to the game in the gaming machine that generates the advantageous state for the player ( The game control device 100) is provided, and the control means includes a first storage means (ROM 111B) storing a program and data used by the control means, and a second storage means (RAM 111C) providing a work area of the program. The first storage means stores a first storage area 111Ba in which a first program, which is a program, and first data, which is data, and a second program, which is a second program, and second data, which is data. There is a second storage area 111Be, and the first storage area 111Ba and the second storage area 111Be sandwich an unused area 111Bd. The second storage means has a first work area 111Ca, which is a work area of the first program, and a second work area 111Cd, which is a work area of the second program, and the first work area 111Ca. And the second work area 111Cd are set across the unused area 111Cc, and the first work area is read and written by the first program but is not read and written by the second program. And a first common area 111Ca2 that can be read and written by the first program and read by the second program. Therefore, the area that can be used for each program in the development process becomes clear, and the development efficiency can be improved.

  In addition, the control means is a game control means (game control device 100) that controls the game as a whole, the first program and the first data are a game control program and data relating to the control of the game, and a second program and The second data is a performance display program and data for displaying information regarding the balance of the game value in the gaming machine. Therefore, in the process of developing the game control means, the usable area for each program is clarified, and the development efficiency can be improved.

  In addition, in the first work area, a dedicated area 111Ca1 that is read and written by the first program but is not read and written by the second program, and a first area that is at least written by the first program and can be read by the second program A second dedicated area 111Cd1 which is provided with a common area 111Ca2 and which is read and written by the second program but not read and written by the first program, and at least written by the second program, and the first program And a second common area 111Cd2 that can be read by. Therefore, in the process of developing the game control means, the usable area for each program is clarified, and the development efficiency can be improved.

  In addition, a game machine is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player The control device includes a control device 100), and the control unit performs a loop process that repeatedly performs a predetermined process and a timer interrupt process that is executed at predetermined time intervals, and uses the information set in the timer interrupt process in the loop process. Thus, the cycle of the loop processing is shorter than the cycle of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the information set in the timer interrupt processing can be surely acquired in the loop processing, and the reliable control processing can be performed.

  In addition, a game area 32 in which the game balls can flow down, and a prize area in which the game balls can be won (general winning holes 351 to 354, starting winning holes 36, normal variation winning device 37, first special) The variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39) are provided, and the winning area can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot win and an open state in which the game ball can easily win. A normal variable winning device 37 that can generate a game execution right by winning is included, and the control means sets the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 to a first operating state and easier to win than the first operating state. In the second operation state, the normal variation winning device control means (game control device 100) that controls in any one of the operating states, the number of prize balls paid out for winning the prize region, and the game region 32. Calculate the base value from the number of game balls shot A base value calculation means (game control device 100) is provided, and in the timer interrupt process, information on whether it is in a special game state, information on whether it is in a second operation state, and a prize ball based on winning in the winning area. The number information and the information on the number of shots, which is the number of game balls shot in the game area 32, are set, and the base value calculation means, in the loop process, based on the information set by the timer interrupt process, the special game. This means that the base value is calculated in a state that is neither the state nor the second operation state. Therefore, the information set in the timer interrupt process can be reliably acquired in the loop process, and the base value can be calculated reliably.

  Further, the winning area includes a special variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) which is opened in the special game state and is capable of winning, and the control means is a special variable player. The number of first abnormal prizes, which is the number of prizes to the special variable winning device in the state where the prize device is not opened, is counted, and the first abnormal state is set when the number of first abnormal prizes reaches a predetermined number. , The second abnormal prize number, which is the number of prizes to the normal variable prize device 37 in the state where the normal variable prize device 37 is not opened, is counted, and when the second abnormal prize number reaches a predetermined number, the second The abnormal value is set, and the base value counting means, until the first abnormal winning number or the second abnormal winning number reaches a predetermined number, even if the first abnormal winning number or the second abnormal winning number exists, the prize ball Based on the number information and the number of shots information When the first abnormal winning number or the second abnormal winning number has reached a predetermined number and is in the first abnormal state or the second abnormal state, information on the number of prize balls, The information on the number of shots will not be used for calculating the base value. Therefore, it is possible to reliably calculate the base value.

  Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the performance control device 300 performs a main process shown in FIG. 74 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 74, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the processing at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3) and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

  After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) of creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in the effect button input process, when the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed, the process of changing the effect content is performed.

  Then, a hall setting mode process for accepting the setting of the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal is performed (step C10), and a player setting mode for accepting the operation of the brightness and the volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the player. Processing is performed (step C11). Next, a random number updating process (step C12) for updating the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

  Next, a received command check process (step C13) that analyzes and responds to the command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display edit process (step C14) that performs settings for controlling the progress of the effect and edits of drawing commands. ) To set the preparation end of the drawing command (step C15). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 ms) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether it is the frame switching timing (step C16). In this embodiment, since the system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds) is created, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frame switching in later than 1/60 seconds). May be switched). When it is determined in step C16 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C16; N), the process of step C16 is repeated. On the other hand, in step C16, when it is determined that it is the frame switching timing (step C16; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C17).

  After that, a sound control process (step C18) for controlling output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b) and a decoration control process (step for controlling LEDs of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, etc.). C19), a board for performing a movable body control process (step C20) for controlling the motor, solenoid, and reel 6 of the board production device 44, and controlling the presentation by the notification unit 72, the point notification unit 73, the cumulative value notification unit 74, and the like. Perform the effect setting process (step C21), and return to the process (step C8) for clearing WDT.

[Reception command check processing]
FIG. 75 shows the received command check process in the main process described above. In this reception command check processing, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception number (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check processing ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

  Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copy for the number of received commands is completed is completed. It is determined (step C206). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer, but the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as follows. As a result, the command (data) can be moved to make a vacant space in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command. In addition, the command analysis can be collectively performed in one round of main processing.

  When it is determined in step C206 that the copying of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the processing returns to step C204. If it is determined that the copying of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207) and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is ended. In this way, in the received command check processing, the commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are analyzed together. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Reception command analysis processing]
FIG. 76 shows the received command analysis process in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

  When it is determined in step C232 or step C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step In C234; N), the received command analysis processing is ended.

  When it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a special figure. When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235; Y), the variable system command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  Further, when it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variable system command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the big hit system command (step C237). The big hit type command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit mid-stage production (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) or a command related to small win mid-stage production (display of a fanfare screen or an end screen). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the big hit type command (step C237; Y), the big hit type command process (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  When it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the big hit type command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol type command (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information related to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special symbol). When MODE is determined to be in the range of the symbol type command (step C239; Y), the symbol type command process (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as the hold number command and error command. (Step C241). The single-shot command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense by combination like a pattern command and a variable command. This single-shot system command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information system command, an error / illegal system command, a model designation command, and a prize notification command. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the single-shot system command (step C241; Y), the single-shot system command process (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.

  In addition, when it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot type commands (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of prefetch symbol type commands (step C243). When MODE is determined to be in the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; Y), the prefetch symbol system command process (step C244) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetch variable system command (step C245). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetching variable system command (step C245; Y), the prefetching variable system command process (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation type command (step C245; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

  The read-ahead variation system command and the read-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the read-ahead effect. The pre-reading effect (also referred to as the pre-reading notice or the pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variation display game corresponding to the starting memory (holding) for which the special figure variation display game is not executed is a big hit when it is subsequently executed. In order to inform the player in advance (or what kind of variation pattern) with a predetermined reliability, the decoration special figure starting memory display or the like displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a manner different from usual, or the display device 41. It is an effect such as performing an effect display. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading variable system command and pre-reading pattern system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which correspond to the starting memory which is the target of pre-reading production, from game control control equipment 100 at the time of starting winning a prize It is transmitted to the performance control device 300. Note that normal variable-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variable display.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 77 shows the variable command processing (step C236) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this variable system command processing, it is first determined whether the special figure classification is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the type of the special figure is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and is the information set in step C251 of the symbol system command processing described above.

  When the special figure type is not determined (step C361; Y), the variable system command processing is ended. Further, if the special figure type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (step C362), and the variable command and the symbol type are It is determined whether there is a mismatch (step C363).

  If the variable command and the symbol type are not compatible (step C363; Y), the variable command processing is ended. If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, outlying symbols, 16R jackpot symbols, 10R jackpot symbols, and small hit symbols. When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, when the stray variation command (variation pattern command) is received, as in the case where the symbol command of the 16R big hit symbol is received, in performing the effect. It means that the combination is inconsistent (combination of variable command and symbol type).

  In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, a variation effect setting process for setting information for performing an effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

  Next, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (state of the pachinko machine) (step C366). Here, the state of changing the special map means that the special map is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, or a fanfare). Furthermore, if the number of pre-reading effects (the number of pre-reading executions) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by -1 (a process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable system command process ends.

  Next, the effect corresponding to the winning will be described. It is possible to display the number of prize balls, which displays the number of prize balls at the corresponding position of the display device 41 in association with the prize, for each of the winning openings that can be won when the player hits the game ball right to the game area 32 on the right side. Has become. FIG. 78 shows an example of display positions for displaying the number of prize balls on the display device 41. Although FIG. 78 shows a state in which all the prize ball number displays are displayed for the sake of explanation, only the prize ball number display corresponding to the winning opening that actually won the prize is displayed for a predetermined period from the winning. .. Further, this prize ball number display is displayed in the first specific game state ST2.

  When there is a winning in the general winning opening 351 provided at the upper right of the center case 40, the number of prize balls based on the winning in the general winning opening 351 is displayed at the display position 41a close to the general winning opening 351. The number of prize balls is displayed as “+3” corresponding to some three. When the first special variation winning device 38 provided on the right side of the center case 40 is won, the first special variation winning device 38 is displayed at the display position 41b near the first special variation winning device 38. The number of prize balls is displayed as “+15” corresponding to 15 which is the number of prize balls based on the winning of the prize.

  When a prize is awarded to the normal variable prize device 37 provided on the right side of the center case 40, an award based on the prize awarded to the normal variable prize device 37 is displayed at the display position 41c close to the normal variable prize device 37. The prize sphere number display is displayed as “+12” corresponding to one sphere. When there is a winning in the general winning opening 352 provided in the lower right of the center case 40, the number of prize balls based on the winning in the general winning opening 352 is displayed at the display position 41d near the general winning opening 352. The number of prize balls is displayed as “+3” corresponding to some three. When the second special variable prize device 39 provided at the lower right of the center case 40 is won, the second special variable prize device 39 is displayed at a display position 41e near the second special variable prize device 39. The number of prize balls is displayed as “+15” corresponding to 15 which is the number of prize balls based on the winning of the prize.

  The general winning opening 351 and the general winning opening 352 in the game area 32 on the right side each detect the winning game ball with another sensor, and the winning notification command is also another command. Therefore, the effect control device 300 can determine which general winning opening has won, and can display the corresponding number of prize balls. Further, the first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, and the normal variable winning device 37 also detect the winning with different sensors, and have different winning notification commands, and the effect control device 300. It is possible to discriminate which winning device has won, and it is possible to display the corresponding number of prize balls.

  By displaying the number of prize balls in this way, it is possible to clearly show the fact that the prize ball has been won in the first specific game state ST2, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to clearly show which winning opening has been won and how many prize balls have been won by the winning, so that a highly entertaining production can be performed. In particular, in the first specific game state ST2, mainly winning the prize balls by winning the second special variation winning device 39, in addition to this, the prize balls based on winning the general winning openings 351 and 352 By showing the player about the acquisition as well, it is possible to improve the interest of the game based on the winning of the general winning a prize which has not received much attention so far, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, it becomes possible to clarify the acquisition of a prize ball by winning the prize in the normal variable winning device 37 or the first special variable winning device 38.

  Further, the general winning openings 353, 354 in the left-side game area 32 which are not targets for displaying the number of prize balls are detected by the winning opening switch 35c after the winning game balls merge. As a result, the number of prize opening switches used is reduced and the cost is reduced. On the other hand, the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 351 and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 351 in the game area 32 on the right side which is the object of displaying the number of prize balls are attached in the vicinity of the winning opening. .. Therefore, it is designed to be detected at an earlier timing from the inflow than in the case of winning the general winning openings 353 and 354 in the game area 32 on the right side. As a result, the time lag from winning to displaying the number of prize balls can be reduced, and the number of prize balls can be displayed without a sense of discomfort.

  The number of prize balls may be displayed even in the second specific game state ST2. Also, the number of prize balls may be displayed not only in the specific game state but also in the special game state and the normal game state. Further, the number of prize balls may be displayed also for the winning in the starting winning opening 36 and the general winning openings 353, 354 in the game area 32 on the left side.

  Based on the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, the game is centrally controlled in a gaming machine that generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player. The game control means (game control device 100), the production control means (production control device 300) that controls the production based on the information from the game control means, the game area 32 in which the game balls can flow down, and the game area. 32, a winning area in which game balls can be won (general winning openings 351 to 354, starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37, first special variation winning device 38, second special variation winning device 39), In the winning area, there are a starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) capable of generating a game execution right, and a plurality of winning openings (general winning openings 351 to 354), Game control hand , For the predetermined winning opening among the plurality of winning holes (generally winning opening 351 and 352), and thus it can transmit to the presentation control means information that enables identifying the prize winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect according to the winning award opening, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, when the effect control means receives the information capable of specifying the winning opening, it is possible to execute different effects depending on the winning opening that won the prize. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the plurality of winning openings may include a special variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) that is opened in the special gaming state to allow winning. Further, the plurality of winning openings may include a starting winning opening 36 and an ordinary variable winning device 37. Further, the universal figure starting gate 34 may be included. Further, the plurality of winning openings may be winning openings that are neither the starting winning opening nor the special variation winning device. Further, the plurality of winning openings may be the winning openings that can always win.

  In addition, the game area 32 includes a first area and a second area, and is configured such that the player can select which area the game ball flows down by adjusting the launching force. In the second area, a special variable prize device (first special variable prize device 38, second special variable prize device 39) is provided with a start prize hole 36 that can always win a prize and general prize holes 353 and 354. ) And a starting winning opening, the game ball can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won, and an open state in which the game ball can be easily won, and general fluctuation winning devices 37, general winning ports 351, 352, When the game ball wins the general winning openings 351 and 352 provided in the second area, the game control means sends information to the effect control means that enables identification of the winning general winning opening. Will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect according to the winning general winning opening, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Next, the prefetch effect will be described. The pre-reading effect is a notice effect that determines the result or variation pattern of the special figure variation display game before starting the special figure variation display game based on starting memory, and suggests or notifies the determination result. The pre-reading effect in the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a notice of a pending change performed in a display mode of a running pending display that displays information of a decorative special figure starting memory display and starting memory of a running special figure variation display game, Zone notice in which background and other effects are specific effects, winning notice in which the effect by voice or display is given when the starting memory of the notification target occurs, and special map variation display based on the target starting memory There is a chance notice that the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game executed before the game is a specific result mode.

  79 and 80 show examples of these look-ahead effects. First, the display on the display device 41 will be described. As shown in FIG. 79A, in the center of the display area of the display device 41, a decorative special figure variable display game display section 85 for displaying the first decorative game of the decorative special figure variable display games is provided. Here, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed by variably displaying the identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas and then stopping the display. In the upper left part of the display area, there is provided a second decoration game display section 88 for displaying the second decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display games. The second decoration game displayed on the second decoration game display section 88 is the same as the first decoration game displayed on the decoration special map variation display game display section 85, and is the left area, the middle area, and the right area. After the identification information is variably displayed, the display is stopped and the result is displayed.

  Further, a memory display section 83 for displaying a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory is provided at the lower center of the display area. The memory display unit 83 is provided with a first memory display unit 83a that displays the first startup memory and a second memory display unit 83b that displays the second startup memory. The decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the first memory display portion 83a corresponds to the first starting memory one-to-one, and is displayed side by side in the memory order. Here, there are three first starting memories. It is shown that. The decorative special figure starting memory display at the left end is the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory stored first, and is shifted to the left each time it is consumed. Further, the second memory display section 83b displays a decorative special figure starting memory display which has a one-to-one correspondence with the second starting memory similarly to the first memory displaying section 83a. Here, it is indicated that the second starting memory is 0.

  On the left side of the first memory display unit 83a, a running memory display unit 84 for displaying a running memory display for displaying information on starting memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently running is provided. The decorative special figure starting storage display at the left end of the first storage display section 83a or the second storage display section 83b is shifted to the running storage display section 84 at the start of the special figure variation display game.

  In the upper right part of the display area, there is provided a starting memory number display section 86 for displaying the starting memory number. The starting memory number display unit 86 is provided with a first starting memory number display unit 86a for displaying the number of first starting memories and a second starting memory number display unit 86b for displaying the number of second starting memories. ing.

  When the first starting memory is exhausted and reduced from the state shown in FIG. 79 (a), the decorative special figure starting memory display at the left end of the first memory display section 83a is displayed as shown in FIG. 79 (b). A display is made to flow into the section 84. Further, in the starting memory number display section 86, the numerical value of the first starting memory number display section 86a is decreased by one. Then, the decorative special figure variable display game display section 85 starts the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first starting memory, and is identified in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas. The variable display of information is started. Also, in the second decoration game display unit 88, the decoration special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first starting memory is started, and the identification information is displayed in each of the left area, the middle area, and the right area. The variable display is started.

  79 (c) and 79 (d) show an example of the notice of pending change. The pending change notice has a normal display mode (here, white display mode) such as the first start memory having the third digestion order shown in FIG. 79 (c) or the running memory display shown in FIG. 79 (d). ) Is different from the above (here, shaded). The execution time of this pending change notice depends on the number of special figure variation display games executed after the start and the execution time of each special figure variation display game, and is an indefinite time. It should be noted that the display mode of the notice of pending change is not limited to that shown here, and may have different shapes and sizes.

  FIG. 79 (e) shows an example of the zone notice. In the zone notice, the background is a background (here, shaded) different from the normal background (white here), and a display is also made as "chance zone" indicating that the zone notice is being executed. The execution time of this zone notice depends on the number of special figure variation display games executed after the start and the execution time of each special figure variation display game, and is an indefinite time. It should be noted that the execution mode of the zone advance notice is not limited to that shown here, and may be any mode that allows the player to recognize that the zone advance notice is being executed. For example, the display mode of the symbols on the decorative special figure variable display game display section 85 may be made different from the normal one, or the sound output mode of the BGM or the like and the light emitting mode of the LED or the like may be made different from the normal one. Is also good.

  FIG. 79 (f) shows an example of the notice at the time of winning the prize. In the winning notice, a notice sound (a sound "pin pawn" here) different from the usual one is output in accordance with the occurrence of the starting memory to be noticed. The warning sound is a predetermined sound, and the execution time of the winning notification is always a fixed time. It should be noted that the execution mode of the advance notice at the time of winning is not limited to the one shown here, and it may be one that performs an effect display in accordance with the occurrence of the start memory that is the advance notification mode, or one that vibrates the effect button or an LED is specified. Alternatively, the light may be emitted in the light emitting mode.

  FIG. 80 shows an example of the advance notice of chance. When the special figure variation display game is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (a), the first start memory is generated as new start memory as shown in FIG. 80 (b). As shown in FIG. 80 (c), in the special figure variation display game in which the starting memory is generated, as a result aspect of the decorative special figure variation display game, the result aspect set at the start of the special figure variation display game (here, “547 )) Is stopped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80D, the next special figure variation display game is started. At this time, the first starting memory generated in FIG. 80 (b) is set as the notice target, and the chance notice is started from this special figure variation display game. Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (e), the result mode of the decorative special figure variable display game of the special figure variable display game is the result mode of "123" which is the chance. The result mode of the chance eye is the result mode of the outlier.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 80 (f), the next special figure variation display game is started, and as shown in FIG. 80 (g), the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game of the special figure variation display game is also a chance. “123” which is Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (h), the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory which is the subject of advance notice is started. The result mode of the special figure variation display game is determined to be in accordance with the result of the special figure variation display game. If the result is a big hit, it is a special result aspect as shown in FIG. If so, as shown in FIG. 80 (j), the result is a mode other than the chance.

  The execution time of each advance notice of the chance is a stop time for displaying the outlier result mode, and is always a constant time. It should be noted that the execution mode of the advance notice of the chance is not limited to that shown here, and a special symbol that is not displayed except the chance may be stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 81 shows a period during which lots of pre-execution effects can be drawn, a period during which effects can be started, and a period during which effects can be executed. The pending change notice can be drawn, started, and executed at any timing or period from the occurrence of the notice of starting memory (t101) to the end of the noticeable game (game D) (t109). .. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the expectation that the notice of the pending change is always started. The executable period is from the start of the notice of pending change to the end (t109) of the special map variable display game to be notified. Since this period changes depending on the execution time of each special figure variable display game, execution The period is indefinite.

  The zone notice is issued at the start time (t103, t105, t107) of the special map variation display game (games B, C, D) that is started after the special figure variation display game (game A) in which the starting memory of the notice object is generated. Lottery and start are possible. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation as to whether or not the zone notice is started at the start of the special figure variation display game. The executable period is a period from any of the above start timings to the end (t109) of the special figure variation display game which is the subject of advance notice. The execution period is indefinite because it changes depending on the execution time.

  The winning notice can be drawn, started, and executed at the time of occurrence of the starting memory to be announced (t101). Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation when the starting memory occurs. Further, since it emits a predetermined voice, the executable period is a predetermined constant period from the occurrence of the starting memory that is the subject of advance notice.

  The advance notice of the chance is a special figure variation display game (here, the game is started after the special figure variation display game in which the start memory is the subject of advance notice) and before the special figure variation display game which is the subject of advance notice. A lottery is performed at the start of (B, C) (t103, t105). The start timing of the chance notice can be started after the special map change display game in which the starting memory for the advance notice has occurred and before the special map change display game for which the advance notice is made. This is the time (t104, t106) when the fluctuation of (here, games B and C) is stopped.

  In addition, the executable period is the special figure variation display game that is started after the special figure variation display game in which the start memory that is the notice is generated and before the special figure variation display game that is the notice is announced ( Here, it is the stop time (t104 to t105, t106 to t107) of games B and C). When there is a plurality of executable periods, if it is executed in the previous game, it is also executed in the subsequent game. By giving such a chance notice, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation at the end of the special figure variation display game. Since the advance notice of the opportunity is given over a predetermined fixed period of the stop time, the feasible period is a fixed period.

  In this way, by making it possible to execute multiple types of pre-reading effects with different lottery timings, start timings, and executable periods, from the occurrence of the starting memory that is the subject of notice to the end of the special figure variation display game that is the subject of notice. A variety of look-ahead effects can be executed, the player can continue to have an expectation that the look-ahead effect will be started, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  For example, the pending change notice can be started at any time.In addition to this, the prize notice is started at the time of winning, the zone notice is started at the start of the special map change display game, and the chance notice is started at the change stop of the special map change display game. There is a possibility. By thus distributing the startable timings of the prefetching effect, the startable timings come one after another, and the player's expectation can be maintained without interruption. Also, since it is possible to start at a timing that is easy for the player to understand, such as the occurrence of a prize, the start of the special figure change display game, and the stop of the change, the player can watch the start of the look-ahead effect with a sense of expectation. The interest can be improved.

  The prefetching effect described above includes a first group that can be continuously executed even during execution of the special map variation display game that is the notice target, and a second group that ends by the start of the special figure variation display game that is the notice target. , And the third group that can be started from the special figure variation display game in which the start memory to be foretold has occurred, and start after the end of the special figure variation display game in which the start memory to be foretended has occurred. And a possible fourth group.

  The pending change notice belongs to the first group and the third group, and the zone notice belongs to the first group and the fourth group. The winning notices belong to the second group and the third group, and the chance notices belong to the second group and the fourth group. In this way, by making the combinations of the groups to which each look-ahead effect belongs different, the characteristics of each look-ahead effect are different, and it becomes possible to execute a variety of look-ahead effects and to belong when selecting a look-ahead effect to be executed. By making selections based on groups, it is possible to select effective effects.

  The look-ahead effect belonging to the first group can effectively increase the player's expectation in the special figure variation display game which is the notice target to which the player pays the most attention. Therefore, it is possible to continuously increase the player's expectation from before the start of the special figure variation display game to be announced until the result is derived. The prefetch effect belonging to the first group can be executed by a lottery that determines whether it can be executed even when the special map variation display game of the notice target is started (t107). Even if it does not exist, there is a possibility that it will be executed in the special map variable display game that is subject to advance notice. Further, the execution period of the prefetch effect belonging to the first group is an undefined period because it changes depending on the execution time of the special figure variation display game included in the execution period.

  The look-ahead effect belonging to the second group can effectively increase the player's expectation until the special figure variation display game. Further, since the pre-reading effect belonging to the second group does not participate in the effect of the special map change display game of the notice target, the effect of the special figure change display game of the notice target can be freely selected. For example, if the result of the special map change display game of the notice target is out of alignment, you can select the same low-expectation effect as when there was no look-ahead effect in the special figure change display game of the notice target, and the game is overkill. It is possible to prevent the expectation of the person from being upset. In addition, even if the look-ahead effect with low expectations is being executed, it is possible to switch to the effect with a high expectation in the special map variation display game of the notice target, and even if the look-ahead effect with low expectations is performed, the player will be notified. You can have expectations.

  Further, the prefetch effect belonging to the second group does not perform the lottery for selecting whether or not to execute the special figure variation display game which is the subject of advance notification (t107). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the types of pre-reading effects that need to be selected by lottery at the start of the special figure variation display game to be announced only as the pre-reading effects of the first group, simplifying the selection process and reducing the control load. be able to. Further, the execution period of the prefetch effect belonging to the second group is a predetermined fixed period that does not depend on the execution time of the special figure variation display game.

  Since each prefetching effect belongs to either the first group or the second group, it is possible to perform an effective effect according to the situation by making a selection based on the group to which it belongs. For example, the look-ahead effect belonging to the first group is effective when the degree of expectation is particularly high, and the look-ahead effect belonging to the second group can be effective even when the degree of expectation is low. Therefore, when the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory that is the target of advance notice is a big hit, the selection ratio of the look-ahead effect belonging to the first group is set higher than when the result is out of order, and conversely to the second group. It is possible to make a selection such that the selection ratio of the prefetching effect to which it belongs is lowered. If the result is off, it is possible to set the selection ratio opposite to this. That is, an effective look-ahead effect can be performed regardless of the degree of expectation.

  The look-ahead effect belonging to the third group can increase the expectation of the player from an early stage. The pre-reading effect belonging to the third group can be executed by a lottery that determines whether or not it can be executed when the start-up memory to be notified is generated (t101), and the advance notification effect can be executed from this timing. ing.

  The prefetch effect belonging to the fourth group can secure the possibility that the prefetch effect is performed even if the prefetch effect of the third group is not executed, and the prefetch effect is not performed when the start memory occurs. Also, it is possible to prevent the player's feeling of expectation from decreasing by not confirming that the expectation is low. In addition, it is possible to prevent the effect of the special figure variation display game being executed from being affected when the starting memory that is the subject of advance notice is made.

  The prefetch effect belonging to the fourth group does not perform the lottery for determining whether or not it can be executed when the start-up memory that is the target of advance notice occurs (t101). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the types of look-ahead effects that need to be selected by lottery when the start-up memory that is the subject of advance notice is generated, and to simplify the selection process and reduce the control load. You can By changing the start timing of the look-ahead effect in this way, it is difficult for the player to know when the look-ahead effect is started, and the interest can be maintained even if the player is playing for a long time.

  Further, since each prefetching effect belongs to either the third group or the fourth group, it is possible to perform an effective effect according to the situation by performing selection based on the group to which the effect belongs. For example, when the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory which is the target of advance notice is a big hit, the look-ahead effect belonging to the fourth group is further increased when the effect belonging to the third group is executed, rather than the case where the result is out of order. It is possible to select a higher execution rate. Further, when the result is out of alignment, it is possible to select a higher rate of executing only one of the third group and the fourth group than when the result is a big hit.

  Note that the prefetch effects of the first group to the fourth group can be executed in duplicate, but a combination that is not executed in duplicate may be provided. For example, the zone notice and the chance notice may not be executed in duplicate. If the lottery times of both parties overlap, if it is selected that one of the lottery times is performed first and then the other lottery time is selected, the other lottery may not be performed. Which is to be prioritized may be predetermined or may be selected by a separate lottery.

  Also, if you do not want to execute the winning notice and the chance notice in duplicate, check whether the winning notice has been executed at the chance notice lottery time, and if the winning notice has been executed It is also possible not to perform the lottery itself for the advance notice of chance. That is, whether or not to execute the subsequent lottery may be determined according to the result of the previous lottery.

  Further, even if the pre-reading effect can be duplicated and executed, whether or not the pre-reading effect has already been executed, and whether or not the pre-reading effect is started later depending on what kind of pre-reading effect is being performed, The execution content and the selection probability may be different. In this case, the table used for the subsequent lottery of the prefetching effect is selected depending on whether or not the prefetching effect has already been executed. Further, as a factor that influences whether or not to execute the prefetching effect later, the execution content, the selection probability, etc., the result and fluctuation pattern of the special figure variable display game to be announced, the current gaming state, the number of starting memories, etc. good. By performing the lottery in multiple stages in this way, it becomes possible to select more flexibly according to the progress of the game, compared to the one in which the lottery is performed once when the starting memory occurs, and it is possible to make the look-ahead production more entertaining. it can.

  Further, it may be indicated that the expectation level is higher when the prefetching effect is performed in duplicate than when the prefetching effect is performed. Further, the degree of expectation may be different due to overlapping combinations. Also in this case, when the lottery times overlap, whether or not to allow duplication is selected according to the result or content of the special map variation display game subject to advance notice. Further, the contents of the pre-reading effect that has been executed first are referred to, and it is selected whether or not to overlap the pre-reading effect at a later lottery time.

  Further, regarding the prefetch effect belonging to the fourth group that is not executed at the time when the start-up memory that is the target of advance notice is generated, the prefetch effect that belongs to the fourth group is executed in a period up to the startable time of the prefetch effect belonging to the fourth group. You may make it perform the production which suggests the possibility of being performed. For example, it is conceivable that the design corresponding to the chance eye is overlaid and displayed as a transparent design on the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85, or an effect display suggesting the start of the zone notice is performed. Since it is the suggested effect, the prefetch effect suggested after the effect may not be executed in some cases.

  Further, as an effect that suggests the start of the prefetching effect, a display that suggests or informs the execution of another prefetching effect may be performed in the display of the pending change notice. For example, as a pending change notice, "ZONE" may be displayed on the decoration special figure starting memory display to indicate or notify execution of the zone notice.

  Further, regarding the prefetch effect belonging to the third group, depending on the situation of the special figure variation display game in which the start memory that is the subject of advance notice has occurred, even if it is selected to be executed by a lottery, the prefetch effect is not immediately started. Is also good. For example, when a specific effect (SP reach, etc.) is being executed in the special figure variation display game in which the start memory to be foretold has been generated, or before the special figure variation display game in which the start memory to be foretured has been generated It is conceivable that the period is a predetermined period. In this case, in the case of a pre-reading effect that can be started at a later timing, such as a notice of pending change, the start time may be delayed so that the pre-reading effect is started after a period in which the pre-reading effect cannot be started.

  In addition, in the lottery for each prefetching effect, the timing to start the prefetching effect may be selected in addition to whether or not the prefetching effect is executed. For example, in the lottery when the start memory that is the subject of the notice of the pending change notice occurs, the start time may be determined to be the start time of the next special figure variation display game in addition to the determination of execution. In addition, it may be possible to select to start from a special figure variation display game that is later than the special figure variation display game that is decided to be executed for the zone notice and the chance notice. Any method may be used to specify such a start time, and it is possible to specify even at a timing other than the timing associated with the execution of the special figure variation display game. For example, a timer effect may be performed in which it is decided to start after a predetermined time from the lottery timing, and a timer indicating the time until the start of the prefetch effect is displayed.

  From the above, when the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result, the starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36 , The normal variation winning device 37) is stored in the starting storage means (game control device 100) and the starting storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit the starting storage which is the right to execute the game based on the winning of the game ball. It is possible to execute advance judgment means (game control device 100) that makes a judgment about the start memory before the game corresponding to the start memory is executed, and notice effect that is an effect that suggests the judgment result by the preliminary judgment means. The production control means is configured to select and execute a preliminary production to be executed from among a plurality of types of preliminary productions. A start memory that belongs to either the first group that can be continuously executed even during the execution of the game to be announced or the second group that ends by the start of the game to be announced Belong to one of the third group that can start the notice effect from the game in which the occurrence occurs and the fourth group that can start the notice effect after the end of the game in which the starting memory to be notified occurs Becomes Therefore, the notice effect having different characteristics depending on the group to which it belongs can be realized, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  Further, the effect control means can execute a plurality of notice effects in an overlapping manner, and can select the content of the notice effect to be executed later according to the type of the notice effect being executed first. Therefore, flexible selection according to the current situation becomes possible, and a more entertaining notice production can be made.

  In addition, it is determined in accordance with the group to which each notice effect belongs whether to select whether to execute the notice effect among the notice effects at a predetermined specific time in the game. Therefore, it is possible to disperse the timing of deciding whether or not to execute the game and to disperse the time of executing the notice production, so that the player can have a sense of expectation over a wide period and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. it can.

  Further, the effect control means can select whether or not to execute the notice effect for the notice effect belonging to the first group when the game to be the notice object for a specific period is started, and the second group. For the notice effect belonging to, it is impossible to select whether to execute the notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide a notice effect in which it is possible to determine whether or not it can be executed when the game to be noticed is started, and a notice effect in which it is not possible to be provided. Can be improved.

  Further, the effect control means can select whether or not to execute the notice effect for the notice effect belonging to the third group when the starting memory as the notice object for a specific time occurs, and the fourth group. For the notice effect belonging to, it is impossible to select whether to execute the notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide a notice effect that can decide whether or not to execute it when a start memory to be noticed occurs and a notice effect that cannot be performed, and it is possible to make the notice effect variegated and entertain the game. Can be improved.

  Further, the notice effect belonging to the first group has a variable execution period, and the notice effect belonging to the second group has an unchanged execution period. Therefore, an appropriate execution period can be set according to the attributes of the notice production. That is, for the notice effect belonging to the first group that can be continued even during the execution of the game to be announced, the player in the game to be notified that is the most noticeable to the player by making the execution period variable The expectation of can be effectively increased. In addition, regarding the notice production belonging to the second group that ends by the start of the game to be announced, by changing the execution period, the production is performed using only a certain time in the game up to the game to be announced. Can be performed, and it is possible not to disturb the production of the game that is not the subject of advance notice.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and other gaming machines, such as other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use the game balls. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, but includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines that use game balls.

  In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

10 Gaming Machine 32 Gaming Area 38 First Special Fluctuation Winning Device 39 Second Special Fluctuation Winning Device 100 Game Control Device (Control Means, Normal Fluctuation Winning Device Control Means, Base Value Calculation Means)

Claims (3)

A game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result,
Equipped with control means for controlling the game,
The control means is
Loop processing that repeats predetermined processing,
Perform timer interrupt processing that is executed every predetermined time,
The information set in the timer interrupt process is configured to be used in the loop process,
A gaming machine characterized in that the cycle of the loop processing is shorter than the cycle of the timer interrupt processing. A game area where game balls can flow down,
A prize area provided in the game area, in which game balls can be won,
The winning area includes a normal variable winning device that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be easily won, and that can generate the right to execute the game by winning. And
The control means is
An ordinary variation winning device control means for controlling the operating state of the ordinary variation winning device in any one of a first operating state and a second operating state in which winning is easier than the first operating state;
A base value calculating means for calculating a base value from the number of prize balls paid out for winning in the prize area and the number of game balls shot in the game area;
In the timer interrupt processing,
Information on whether it is in the special game state,
Information indicating whether the second operation state is set,
Information on the number of prize balls based on winning in the prize area,
Information on the number of shots, which is the number of game balls shot in the game area, is set,
The base value calculation means,
2. The game according to claim 1, wherein in the loop processing, a base value in a state that is neither the special game state nor the second operation state is calculated based on the information set in the timer interrupt process. Machine. The winning area includes a special variable winning device that can be won by being opened in the special gaming state,
The control means is
The first abnormal prize number, which is the number of prizes to the special variable prize device in a state where the special variable prize device is not opened, is counted, and when the first abnormal prize number reaches a predetermined number, the first abnormal state Set
The second abnormal state is counted when the second abnormal prize number, which is the number of prizes to the ordinary variable prize device in a state where the ordinary variable prize device is not opened, is counted, and the second abnormal prize number reaches a predetermined number. Set
The base value counting means,
Until the first abnormal winning number or the second abnormal winning number reaches the predetermined number, even if the first abnormal winning number or the second abnormal winning number is present, the information of the number of prize balls, The information on the number of shots can be used to calculate the base value,
When the first abnormal winning number or the second abnormal winning number has reached the predetermined number and is in the first abnormal state or the second abnormal state, information on the number of prize balls and 3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the number of shots and the base value are not used in the calculation of the base value.

Images